high school lobby addition...specifications: wilton community school district high school lobby...

Volume 2: STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL

HIGH SCHOOL LOBBY ADDITION 1002 CYPRESS STREET, WILTON, IOWA 52778

WILTON COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT 1002 CYPRESS STREET, WILTON, IOWA 52778

PROJECT MANUAL

ARCHITECT PROJECT NUMBER: I1819.01

ARCHITECT: Martin Gardner Architecture, P.C. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: Point Builders CIVIL ENGINEER: Fehr-Graham STRUCTURAL: IMEG MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: KCL Engineering January 2020

SPECIFICATIONS: WILTON COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT HIGH SCHOOL LOBBY ADDITION WILTON, IOWA ARCHITECT PROJECT #I1819.01

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000101 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES PAGE NOS. DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE SECTION 031000 – CONCRETE FORMWORK 8 4-11 SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 6 12-17 SECTION 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22 18-39 DIVISION 05 – METALS SECTION 051223 – STRUCTURAL STEEL 13 40-52 SECTION 052100 – STEEL JOISTS 6 53-58 SECTION 053100 – STEEL DECK 6 59-64 SECTION 054000 – COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING (CFSF) SYSTEM 6 65-70 DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 211119 – FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 2 71-72 SECTION 211313 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 13 73-85 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION 220517 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 3 86-88 SECTION 220518 – ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 1 89 SECTION 220519 – METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 4 90-93 SECTION 220523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 4 94-97 SECTION 220529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT 7 98-104 SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT 2 105-106 SECTION 220719 – PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 10 107-116 SECTION 221116 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 7 117-123 SECTION 221119 – DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 5 124-128 SECTION 221316 – SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 9 129-137 SECTION 221319 – SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 4 138-141 SECTION 223300 – ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 4 142-145 SECTION 224213 – COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 4 146-149 SECTION 224214 – COMMERCIAL URINALS 3 150-152 SECTION 224216 – COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 3 153-155 SECTION 224217 – COMMERCIAL SINKS 3 156-158 SECTION 224223 – COMMERCIAL SHOWERS 2 159-160 SECTION 224716 – PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 2 161-162 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION 230513 – COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2 163-164 SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2 165-166 SECTION 230593 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 11 167-177 SECTION 230713 – DUCT INSULATION 8 178-185 SECTION 230763 – FAN-COIL UNITS 7 186-192 SECTION 230900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 3 193-195 SECTION 231123 – FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 8 196-203 SECTION 233113 – METAL DUCTS 8 204-211 SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 4 212-215 SECTION 233423 – HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 4 216-219 SECTION 233713 – REGISTERS AND GRILLES 2 220-221 SECTION 237423.16 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS 7 222-228 SECTION 238239.13 – CABINET UNIT HEATERS 3 229-231

PAGE 1 OF 2

01/27/2020 2


TABLE OF CONTENTS 000101 - 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTD. NO. OF PAGES PAGE NOS. DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 260519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2 232-233 SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3 234-236 SECTION 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 237-238 SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 239-244 SECTION 260553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 245-248 SECTION 260923 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 6 249-254 SECTION 262416 – PANELBOARDS 6 255-260 SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES 4 261-264 SECTION 262816 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 4 265-268 SECTION 265119 – LIGHTING 5 269-273 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 270000 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 10 274-283 SECTION 270505 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 4 284-287 SECTION 270526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 5 288-292 SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 6 293-298 SECTION 270544 – SLEEVES & SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMS. PATHWAYS & CABLING 4 299-302 SECTION 270553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 4 303-306 SECTION 271116 – COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 4 307-310 SECTION 271300 – COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 6 311-316 SECTION 271500 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 7 317-323 SECTION 274100 – AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS 5 324-328 SECTION 275116 – PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 6 329-334 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 280000 – GENERAL RECQ. FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS 8 335-342 SECTION 280505 – SELECTIVE DEMO. OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS 4 343-346 SECTION 281316 – SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6 347-352 SECTION 282000 – VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 4 353-356 SECTION 284600 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 10 357-366 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK SECTION 312300 – FOUNDATION EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 8 367-374

DIVISION 34 – APPENDIX SECTION 340000 – TERRACON GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT 28 375-402

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE 2 OF 2

01/27/2020 3


SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Design, construction and treatment of formwork and related accessories to confine and shape concrete to the required dimensions.

B. Installation of embedded items such as waterstops.

C. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding concrete formwork shall be considered a part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Where provisions of the pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern.

1. ACI 117 - Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 5. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 6. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 7. NIST - PS 1: Structural Plywood

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Special Inspection and Testing:

1. In accordance with Chapter 17 of the International Building Code, the Owner shall employ a Special Inspection Agency to perform the duties and responsibilities specified in Section 1704.0.

2. Refer to architectural, civil, mechanical, and electrical specifications for testing and inspection requirements of non-structural components.

3. Work performed on the premises of a fabricator approved by the building official need not be tested and inspected per the table below. The fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance that the work has been performed in accordance with the approved plans and specification to the building official and the Architect and Engineer of Record.

01/27/2020 4



4. Duties of the Special Inspection Agency:

a. Perform all testing and inspection required per the Testing and Inspection Schedule indicated below.

b. Furnish inspection reports to the building official, the Owner, the Architect, the Engineer of Record, and the General Contractor. The reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of inspected work.

c. Submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the Special Inspection Agency’s knowledge in conformance with the approved plans and specifications.

5. Structural Component Testing and Inspection Schedule for Section 0310003 10 00 is as follows:

Concrete and Concrete Placement Con

tinuo

us

Perio

dic

Referenced Standard IBC Reference

Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete member being formed.

X ACI 318: 26.11.1.2 (b)

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design and engineering of formwork is the responsibility of the Contractor. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to conform to Contract Documents and in accordance with building code requirements. Design for construction loads, lateral pressure, and requirements of the applicable building code to conform to the required shape, line and dimensions.

B. Foundation concrete may be placed directly into neat excavations, provided the foundation trench walls are stable as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer. In such case, the minimum formwork indicated on the drawings is mandatory to ensure clean excavations immediately prior to and during the placing of concrete.

1. When forms are omitted, provide additional 1” concrete minimum on each side of the minimum design profiles and dimensions shown on the drawings.

C. Drawings show the design requirements and dimensions for structural strength, but structural drawings do not show all detail dimensions to fit intricate architectural and mechanical detail. Contractor shall so construct the concrete work that it will conform to the clearance required by the architectural, mechanical and electrical design.

D. Maximum deflection of facing materials forming concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the center-to-center span between structural members of the formwork.

E. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained adequate strength for that purpose. Where adequate foundations for shores and struts cannot be secured, provide trussed supports.

01/27/2020 5



1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions and specifications for each of the following:

1. Waterstop profiles 2. Form sealer 3. Form release agent(s), including certification that agent is compatible with finish 4. Form ties and spreaders

B. Testing for Formwork Removal: When methods other than cylinder tests are proposed for determining time for formwork removal, submit data on methods for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Formwork Accessories: Use commercially manufactured accessories for formwork accessories that are partially or completely embedded in concrete, including ties and hangers.

B. Sealer: Clear, penetrating, synthetic resin sealer.

C. Formwork Release Agent: Use commercially manufactured form release agents that will prevent formwork absorption of moisture, prevent bond with concrete, and will not stain the concrete surface. Reapply to cleaned forms before each reuse. Formwork release agent shall be compatible with paint or any other finish applied to the concrete; submit data indicating compatibility.

D. Waterstops: Waterstops shall be a flexible butyl rubber and bentonite clay compound that swells upon contact with water. Acceptable manufacturer’s and products:

1. CETCO – Waterstop RX 2. Greenstreak – Swellstop 3. J.P. Specialties – Earth Shield (Type 20 & 23) Waterstop

E. Form Material:

1. No aluminum shall be allowed in the concrete work unless coated to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction.

2. Concrete form materials must be used in a manner to provide the surface finish specified.

3. Design formwork in accordance with the provisions of the building code or the following standards if not covered in the building code:

a. Wood - AF & PA “National Design Specification”. b. Plywood - American Plywood Association “Plywood Design Specification”. c. Steel - AISC “Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design”. d. Aluminum - Aluminum Association “Aluminum Construction Manual”. e. Concrete - ACI 318. f. Other materials - as directed by manufacturer.

01/27/2020 6



F. Chamfer Strips:

1. Chamfer strips shall be the size as indicated on the drawings. Provide in maximum possible lengths.

2.2 FORM FINISHES

A. Rough Form Finish:

1. Concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work shall have a rough-form finish. No form-facing material is specified for rough-form finish.

2. Set and maintain forms so finished concrete dimensions shall conform to the tolerances. Rough form finish is Designated Surface Finish-1.0 from ACI 301, except that surface tolerance Class C is required as specified in ACI 117.

B. Smooth Form Finish:

1. Concrete surfaces exposed to view in the finished work or surfaces to receive finishes of any type (paint, textured paint, etc.) shall have a smooth form finish. Form-facing material shall be plywood, tempered concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, plastic, paper, or other acceptable material capable of producing the desired finish. Form-facing material shall produce a smooth, uniform texture on the concrete. Do not use form facing material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects that might impair the texture of the concrete surfaces.

2. Set and maintain forms so finished concrete dimensions shall conform to the tolerances. Smooth form finish is Designated Surface Finish-3.0 from ACI 301, including surface tolerance Class A as specified in ACI 117.

C. Patching and repairing concrete finishes are specified under Section 03 30 00.

2.3 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE

A. Form Ties and Spreaders: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms, hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together, and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1-1/2 inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

4. At horizontal pour lines, locate ties not more than 6” below the pour lines. Tighten after concrete has set and before the next pour is made.

5. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide form ties of removable type with permanent plugs and a system approved by the Architect for fixing the plugs in place.

B. Waterstops: Fabricate pieces of premolded waterstop with a maximum practicable length to hold the number of end joints to a minimum. Fabricate joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

01/27/2020 7



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF TEMPORARY FORMWORK

A. In accordance with ACI 301, construct formwork:

1. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

2. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on the drawings.

B. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.

2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only.

3. Chamfer wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like to allow wood to swell without spalling concrete and to ensure easy removal.

C. Falsework:

1. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and struts. Do not adjust formwork after concrete has taken its initial set. Brace formwork securely against lateral deflection and lateral instability.

2. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with the drawings.

3. Fasten form wedges in place after final adjustment of forms and prior to concrete placement.

4. Anchor formwork to shores, supporting surfaces, or members to prevent upward or lateral movement of the formwork system during concrete placement.

5. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent displacement and to safely support construction loads.

6. Construct forms plumb and straight to conform to slopes, lines, and dimensions shown.

7. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

8. Provide runways for moving equipment and support runways directly on formwork or structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel.

D. Where end-of-work sequence requires a joint in the concrete, provide adequately designed additional formwork. Extend reinforcement through formwork as indicated on the drawings. Location of the construction joint is subject to approval by the Architect and the SEOR.

E. Construct formwork for wall openings to facilitate removal and to counteract swelling of wood formwork. Keep wood forms wet as necessary to prevent shrinkage.

01/27/2020 8



F. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Provide temporary openings at the base of column and wall formwork and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection.

H. Unless noted otherwise, all footings shall be centered under walls, piers or columns.

I. Provisions for Other Trades:

1. Place sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for support of adjoining work prior to concrete placement.

2. Position and support expansion joint material and other embedded items to prevent displacement. Fill voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots temporarily with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into voids.

J. Projecting corners of beams, walls and columns shall be formed with a 3/4-inch chamfer, unless noted otherwise on architectural drawings.

K. Cleaning:

1. Clean surfaces of formwork and embedded materials of mortar, grout, and foreign material before concrete is placed.

2. Cover surfaces of formwork with acceptable formwork release agent. Apply form release agent before placing reinforcing steel and concrete according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not allow formwork release agent to puddle in forms. Do not allow formwork release agent to contact reinforcing steel or hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. Do not apply form release agent to concrete surfaces receiving special finishes or applied coverings affected by the agent.

3. Clean and inspect formwork immediately before concrete is placed.

L. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.

M. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Install all required pipe sleeves, cavities or slots. Notify appropriate trades in due time so that they may furnish information and make necessary installations. Check sizes, location and alignment of all openings, frames and other work, which are to be built-in including electrical boxes and conduit.

B. Layout the run of partitions and establish location of openings so that other trades may properly locate their work.

C. Core drilling concrete is not permitted unless noted otherwise or approved in writing by the Architect. Notify the Architect in advance of conditions not shown on the drawings.

01/27/2020 9



3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Built-In Items:

1. Confirm with Architect that all materials to be embedded are suitable for embedment in concrete.

2. Build in anchors, inserts, and other devices indicated or required for various portions of work.

3. Build in sleeves, thimbles, and other items furnished or set in place by other trades.

4. Accurately position and support all embedded items prior to concrete placement. Secure embedded items against displacement during concrete placement operations.

5. Fill voids with readily removable material to prevent entry of concrete into voids.

6. Mechanical and electrical shall provide and set required sleeves.

7. Coordinate setting of all embedded items.

B. Waterstops:

1. Locate waterstops in joints where indicated on the drawings.

2. Build in waterstops using longest unbroken lengths possible to hold the number of end splices to a minimum.

3. Form splices and intersections strictly according to the manufacturer’s instructions so that waterstops are continuous and develop effective watertight joint.

4. Locate waterstops as shown on the drawings. In general, waterstops should be located just behind outermost layer of reinforcing. Do not place waterstops closer than 2" from face of concrete.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Construction formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 and ACI 117.

3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. When removal of formwork is based on concrete reaching a specified compressive strength, concrete will be presumed to have reached this strength when either of the following requirements has been met:

1. Test cylinders, molded and cured under the same conditions for moisture and temperature as used for the concrete they represent, have reached the specified compressive strength.

2. Concrete has been cured in accordance with the specifications for the same length of time as laboratory-cured cylinders, which have reached the specified strength. Determine the length of time concrete has been cured in the structure by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50F and the concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed from evaporation and loss of moisture.

01/27/2020 10



B. Forms shall remain in place for the following periods of time. These periods represent cumulative number days or hours, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air surrounding the concrete is above 50F:

1. Walls and Footings: 67% specified compressive strength or minimum 24 hours.

C. When finishing is required, remove forms as soon as removal operations will not damage concrete.

D. Loosen wood formwork for wall openings when this can be accomplished without causing damage to concrete.

E. Do not allow removal of formwork to damage the fresh concrete for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts supporting the weight of the concrete. Perform needed repair and treatment required on vertical surfaces at once and follow immediately with specified curing.

3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

B. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 11


SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fabrication and placement of reinforcing steel for concrete, and all related accessories.

B. Reinforcing steel for use in bond beams, masonry columns, and lintels is specified in Division 4 and is not a part of the work in this section.

C. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding concrete reinforcement shall be considered a part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Where provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern.

1. ACI 117 - Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI SP-066 - ACI Detailing Manual. 5. ASTM A184 - Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for

Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Allow Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete. 9. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice.




01/27/2020 12











tinuo

us

Perio

dic


Inspection of fabricators and during fabrication. X 1704.2

Inspection of reinforcing steel, and placement. X ACI 318 Ch. 20, 25.2,

25.3, 26.6.1-26.6.3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Placing Drawings: Submit placing drawings showing fabrication dimensions and locations for placement of reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. Indicate bar sizes, spacing, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting diagrams, anchors, and supporting and spacing devices. Dowels shall be shown in placing drawings for the element that is to be placed first. Reinforcing steel descriptions or shop drawings shall be inch-pound sizes.

B. Manufacturer’s Certifications:

1. Submit mill certifications at time of delivery. 2. Submit carbon equivalent (CE) for reinforcing bars to be welded.

01/27/2020 13



C. Splices: Submit request for splices not indicated in the Contract Documents. Request shall indicate locations, types, and lengths of splices for approval.

D. Field Bending: Submit requests and procedure for field bending or straightening of reinforcement partially embedded in concrete not described in the Contract Documents.

E. Reinforcement Relocation: Submit requests to adjust reinforcement spacing necessitated by conflicts with other reinforcement, conduits, etc. for approval.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate reinforcement installation with the placement of formwork and other embedded items such as inserts, conduit, pipe sleeves, drains, metal supports, anchor rods, etc.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcement to the jobsite in bundles sorted and labeled with durable tags indicating bar size, length, and shop drawing mark. Bundles shall also bear testing laboratory tags indicating identified steel.

B. Store elevated clear of ground and protect at all times from contamination and deterioration.

C. Prevent bending, coating with earth, oil, or other material, or otherwise damaging the reinforcement.

D. Store welding electrodes in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.4.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Bar Deformations: Bars used for reinforcement shall be deformed except column spirals and welded wire reinforcement, which may be plain.

B. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel shall conform to the ASTM standard and grade indicated in the General Notes on the drawings.

C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to the ASTM standard indicated in the General Notes on the drawings.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with square ends and free of burrs.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

01/27/2020 14



2. Concrete cast against earth: Bars may be supported by precast concrete bricks or approved prefabricated wire bar supports complying with CRSI recommendations with footpads large enough to support the weight of the bars and construction traffic without being pushed into underlying grade. Precast concrete blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 6,000 psi.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication Tolerances: Reinforcing steel shall be shop fabricated within tolerances according to ACI 117 and other applicable codes, and shall conform in size, shape, quantity, dimensions, etc. to the construction drawings and approved shop drawings.

B. Bar Condition: Bars shall be free from mill scale, excessive rust and other coatings, which would reduce or destroy the bond with the concrete. Wipe oil from forms before reinforcement is placed on or adjacent to so that oil will not be tracked over or in any way come into contact with the reinforcement.

C. Bars Bending: Bars shall be bent cold, and no method of fabrication shall be used which would be injurious to the material. Heating of bars for bending is not permitted.

D. Identification: After fabrication, bars shall be sorted, bundled and tagged with metal tags bearing the bar mark before delivery to the jobsite.

E. Corner Bars: Provide corner bars to make reinforcing continuous at all times, including intersections at footings, walls, beams or caps. Such bars shall be the same size and spacing as the horizontal reinforcing and each leg shall have a length of at least 30 inches.

F. Splicing:

1. Continuous reinforcing in beams and grade beams shall be lapped as follows unless noted otherwise:

a. Top bars Midspan b. Bottom bars Directly over support

2. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with the SEOR and obtain written approval prior to proceeding.

G. Where beams and grade beams are simple span, top bars shall be continuous for full length and hooked down at each end.

H. Reinforcing for continuous footings shall extend into spread footings a minimum of 2'-0".

I. Dowels between footings and walls or columns shall be the same grade, size and spacing or number as the vertical reinforcing respectively, unless noted otherwise.

01/27/2020 15



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING

A. Reinforcement Relocation: When necessary to move reinforcement beyond the specified spacing to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or embedded items, submit resulting arrangement of reinforcement to SEOR for approval.

B. Reinforcement Cutting: Cutting of reinforcement which conflicts with embedded objects is not acceptable.

C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Extend welded wire reinforcement to within 1 inch of the concrete edge. Lap edges and ends of fabric sheets a minimum of two full mesh squares. Lace edges with 16-gauge tie wire. Support welded wire reinforcement during placing of concrete to assure required positioning in the slab. Do not place wire reinforcement on grade or metal deck and raise into position in freshly-placed concrete.

D. Wire Tie Orientation: Set wire ties so that ends are directed away from concrete surface.

E. Slab on Grade Reinforcement Placement: Place shrinkage and temperature reinforcement 2 inches from the top surface of the slabs on grade unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

F. Do not cut, displace, or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

G. Support for Reinforcement: Unless noted otherwise, supports for reinforcement shall have Class 2 protection as defined in the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Submit data on supports indicating class of protection at all different locations for approval. Supports shall not be used as bases for runways for concrete-conveying equipment and similar construction loads. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2” beyond last leg of any continuous bar support.

H. Support for Bars in Concrete Cast on Ground: Bar supports for slabs on grade, grade beams, footings, and all other concrete cast directly onto grade shall be supported at an average spacing of 4 feet or less in each direction.

I. Securing Reinforcing Bars: All bars must be placed, spaced, secured and supported prior to casting concrete. Bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete shall not be bent unless approved in writing prior to placement by the SEOR.

J. Foot Traffic: Restrict foot traffic over the slab on grade reinforcing after it has been properly positioned.

K. Reinforcement at Expansion Joints: Do not continue reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to concrete through expansion joints. Dowels bonded on only one side of a joint and waterstops may extend through joint.

01/27/2020 16



L. Pumping Concrete: When using a pump to place concrete, pump hose shall be supported directly on forms. Do not allow hose to rest on reinforcing bars if doing so could cause displacement of bars.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 17


SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. All items required for executing and completing the cast-in-place concrete work and related work shown on the drawings or specified herein. Work shall include installation of items furnished in other sections of these specifications.

B. Concrete paving, walks, and curbs are specified in Division 3 or 32.

C. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding cast-in-place concrete shall be considered a part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork. C. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. D. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Where any provision of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern.

1. ACI 117 - Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 4. ACI 302.2R - Guide for Concrete Slabs that Received Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 5. ACI 304R - Guide to Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 6. ACI 305.1 - Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 306.1 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. 8. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete. 9. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 10. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 11. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 12. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 13. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 14. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 15. ASTM C42 - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams

of Concrete. 16. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 17. ASTM C138 - Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content

(Gravimetric) of Concrete. 18. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 19. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 20. ASTM C157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar

and Concrete 21. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

01/27/2020 18



22. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 23. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric

Method. 24. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure

Method. 25. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 26. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete. 27. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 28. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan

for Use in Concrete. 29. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing

Concrete. 30. ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. 31. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic Cement

Concrete. 32. ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for

Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation. 33. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 34. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 35. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. 36. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth

Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 37. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing,

or Special Inspection. 38. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness

Numbers. 39. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with

Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 40. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice.









01/27/2020 19






tinuo

us

Perio

dic


Review of proposed mix design and supporting test results X

Inspect anchors cast in concrete X ACI 318: 17.8.2

Inspect anchors post-installed in hardened concrete members. A. Adhesive anchors installed in horizontally or upwardly inclined

orientations to resist sustained tension loads. X

ACI 318: 17.8.2.4

B. Mechanical anchors and adhesive anchors not defined in row above.

X ACI 318: 17.8.2

Verify use of required design mix X ACI 318: Ch. 19, 26.4.3,

26.4.4 1904.1, 1904.2

Prior to concrete placement, fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete.

X

ASTM C172, ASTM C31, ACI 318:

26.4, 26.12

Inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques X ACI 318:

26.5

Verify maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. X ACI 318: 26.5.3-26.5.5

Verify in-situ concrete strength prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs

X ACI 318: 26.11.2

FF and FL slab on grade flatness testing ASTM E1155

B. Sampling and testing requirements:

1. Maintain records verifying materials used are of the specified and accepted types and sizes and are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Use of testing services will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the Contract Documents.

3. Take samples of fresh concrete at the job site for each mix design placed each day. Sampling and testing shall be done after the final addition and proper mixing of any water or admixtures that are added on site.

a. Personnel and testing equipment shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329.

01/27/2020 20



b. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 150 cu. yd. or 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area, whichever is less or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

1) On a given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing required above would provide less than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five batches are used.

c. A strength test shall be the average of the strengths of two 6x12 inch or three 4x8 inch cylinders made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days.

4. For each sample of fresh concrete, perform the following duties:

a. Measure and record slump in accordance with ASTM C143.

b. Measure and record temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064.

1) Provide one test hourly when air temperature is 40F and below and when 80F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

c. Measure and record air content by volume in accordance with either ASTM C231 or ASTM C173.

d. Mold three 6x12 inch or four 4x8 inch cylinders (laboratory cylinders) in accordance with ASTM C31 to be laboratory-cured. Protect from moisture loss and maintain at 60F to 80F for 24 to 48 hours before moving. Deliver cylinders to testing laboratory for curing and testing.

e. Mold one cylinder (field cylinder) in accordance with ASTM C31 to be field-cured. Field cylinder shall be placed as near as possible to the in-place concrete from which it was taken, protected, and cured in the same manner. Deliver field-cured cylinder to testing laboratory, and measure and record compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39. Field cylinder shall be used to determine if concrete footings, walls, or piers have reached the required compressive strength for steel erection to begin.

5. Measure and record compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C39 for laboratory cylinders. Test one laboratory cylinder at 7 days and all other cylinders at 28 days. Acceptance is based on the average of the two 6x12 inch or three 4x8 inch laboratory cured 28-day tests. Notify Architect in the event strength levels do not meet the acceptance requirements of ACI 318.

a. Any additional cylinders molded for Contractor to have a compressive strength test done before seven days shall be at the Contractor's expense.

6. Prepare and submit test reports to the Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Supplier. Reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of testing. Refer to description in Submittals.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Should the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, fall below the minimum 28-day compressive strength specified on the drawings, upon approval of the Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR), the concrete supplier shall adjust the

01/27/2020 21



concrete mix for remaining portion of construction so that the resulting concrete meets the minimum strength requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Concrete Materials: Submit information on concrete materials as listed below.

1. Cementitious materials: Submit type, class, producer name, and certification not more than 90 days old of compliance with applicable ASTM standard.

2. Aggregates: Submit type, pit or quarry location, producer name, gradations, specific gravity, water content, and certification not more than 90 days old.

3. Admixtures: Submit product data sheet. Product data shall include: dosages and performance data, brand names, producers, chloride ion concentrations, and certifications of compliance with applicable ASTM standard. Certifications shall not be more than 90 days old.

4. Water: Submit name of source.

B. Product Data: Prepare and submit product and performance data for materials and accessories, including patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, finish materials and other concrete related items.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: When requested, the proposed testing agencies shall submit data on qualifications for acceptance.

D. Concrete Mix Design:

1. Concrete mix design submittals shall be submitted to the SEOR for review and approval at least 14 days prior to placing concrete.

2. Submit concrete mixture proportions and characteristics for each concrete mix. Include standard deviation analysis or trial batch data with mix design. Submit historical field test data to demonstrate the average compressive strength for approval. Concrete mix proportions, materials, and handling methods for field test data or trial batches shall be the same as used for the work. Include the following information for each mix design:

a. Water/cementitious materials ratio. b. Slump per ASTM C143 c. Air content per ASTM C231 or ASTM C173 d. Unit weight of concrete per ASTM C138 e. Compressive strength at 28 days per ASTM C39

3. If trial batches are used, submit representative samples of each proposed ingredient to independent testing laboratory for use in preparation of mix design.

4. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

5. Provide a record copy of the final mix designs and test results to the testing agency prior to commencement of the concrete work.

E. Slab-on-Grade Joint Layout: Submit drawings for proposed slab-on-grade control joint and construction joint layout for approval.

01/27/2020 22



F. Construction Sequence Submittal: Contractor shall submit an elevated slab construction sequence indicating construction joints and the pour sequence.

G. Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials, mix design, compressive strength, slump, air content, and temperature. Each report shall indicate date of sampling, date of test, mix design, and location of concrete in structure.

H. Repair Methods: When stains, rust, efflorescence, and surface deposits must be removed, submit the proposed method of removal.

I. Certificates: Submit written certification regarding the design mix from the ready-mix supplier and the admixture manufacturer stating all concrete and admixtures do not contain chloride ions in excess of concentrations specified herein.

J. Placement Notification: Notify the Architect at least 24 hours in advance of concrete placement.

K. Adjustments: Submit any adjustments to mixture proportions or changes in materials, suppliers, or sources, along with supporting documentation, during the course of the work.

L. Cold Weather Procedure Submittal: Refer to Cold Weather Concreting article in Part 3 for more information.

M. Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Cementitious materials: Store cementitious materials in dry weather tight buildings, bins, or silos that exclude contaminants.

B. Aggregates: Store and handle aggregate in a manner that will avoid segregation and prevent contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Store aggregates so as to drain freely.

C. Admixtures: Protect stored admixtures against contamination, evaporation, or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes, which would adversely affect their performance. Handle chemical admixtures in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I Normal, and be a standard brand of Portland cement. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless approved in writing by the Engineer. Cement, which conforms to ASTM C150 Type II, may be used if it also meets the requirements of ASTM C150 Type I. Cement used in concrete shall be of the same brand and type as the cement used in the concrete represented by the submitted field test data or used in the trial mixtures. Maintain consistent cement color throughout project unless directed otherwise by architectural requirements.

1. Total replacement of Portland cement by supplementary cementitious materials in design mixture shall not exceed 50% (by weight).

01/27/2020 23



B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials

1. Fly Ash: Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618, Class C or Class F. Replacement of Portland cement by fly ash shall not exceed the following (percentages are by weight):

a. Concrete Flatwork: 20 percent. b. Mass Concrete (more than two feet thick): 50 percent. c. All other concrete: 25 percent. d. Concrete to be placed in cold weather as defined herein: No fly ash allowed unless the

cold weather procedure submitted has compensated for the increased setting time and decreased rate of strength gain due to cold weather and fly ash.

2. Slag Cement: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.

a. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag Limit: 50% by weight of total cementitious materials.

b. In mass concrete more than 2 feet thick, the usage rate may be 80% by weight of total cementitious materials.

3. Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag:

a. Supplementary Cementitious Materials Limit: 50% with fly ash not exceeding 25% by weight of total cementitious materials.

b. In mass concrete more than 2 feet thick: 80% with fly ash not exceeding 50% by weight of total cementitious materials.

C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ASTM C33. Provide coarse aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete. Gradations shall be similar to that described in the following table:

COARSE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS

SIEVE SIZE - PERCENT PASSING

Grade No. 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" No. 4 No. 16

4 90-100 Note 1

20-55 0-15 --- 0-5 ---

57 100 95-100 --- 25-60 0-10 0-10 ---

67 100 90-100 --- 20-55 0-10 ---

89 --- --- --- 100 90-100 20-55 0-10

1. Shall be 100 percent passing the 2" sieve.

01/27/2020 24



D. Fine Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ASTM C33. Provide fine aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete. Fine aggregate shall consist of washed sand. Gradations shall be similar to that described in the following table:

FINE AGGREGATE GRADATIONS


Grade No. 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50 No. 80 No. 100

FA 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 5-30 --- 0-10

E. Do not use aggregates containing deleterious substances that could cause spalling on any exterior exposed surface. These include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Organic impurities. 2. Ferrous metals. 3. Soluble salts. 4. Coal, lignite, or other lightweight materials. 5. Soft particles. 6. Clay lumps and friable particles. 7. Cherts of less than 2.40 specific gravity.

F. Water: Mixing water for concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C94. Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, organic materials, chloride ions and oils deleterious to concrete or reinforcing steel.

G. Testing agency shall be given access to plants and stockpiles to obtain samples for testing for compliance with the Contract Documents.

2.2 ADMIXTURES

A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures. Calcium chloride thiocyanates or admixtures containing intentionally added chlorides are not permitted.

B. Water Reducing Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:

1. BASF Corporation - MasterPozzolith Series or MasterPolyheed Series. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon WR Series. 3. Sika Chemical Corp. - Plastocrete 161. 4. GRT – Polychem 400 NC. 5. Grace Construction Products - WRDA 82.

C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (superplasticizer): Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:

1. BASF Corporation - MasterRheobuild 1000 or MasterGlenium Series. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon 37 or Plastol Series. 3. Sika – ViscoCrete 2100. 4. GRT – Melchem. 5. Grace Construction Products - Mira 110.

01/27/2020 25



D. High Range Water Reducing, Slump Retaining Admixture: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:

1. BASF Corporation - MasterGlenium 7700. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucon 537, Eucon 1037, or Plastol Series. 3. Sika – Sikament 686. 4. GRT – Melchem – M. 5. Grace Construction Products – ADVA FLEX.

E. Non-Chloride Accelerator: Material shall comply with ASTM C494, Type C or Type E, and not contain a higher chloride ion concentration than municipal drinking water. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:

1. BASF Corporation - MasterSet FP 20 or MasterSet AC 534. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Accelguard Series. 3. Sika Chemical Corp. - Sika Rapid-1. 4. GRT – Polychem HE. 5. Grace Construction Products – Lubricon NCA.

F. Air Entraining Admixture: Air entraining admixture shall comply with ASTM C260, and be certified by the manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures to be used. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:

1. BASF Corporation - MasterAir Series. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Air-Mix or AEA Series. 3. Sika Chemical Corporation - Sika-Aer. 4. GRT – Polychem VR. 5. Grace Construction Products - Darex II or Daravair 1000.

G. Admixtures used in concrete shall be the same brand, type, and dosage used in concrete represented by field test data or used in trial mixes.

2.3 CURING PRODUCTS

A. Moisture Retaining Cover:

1. Plastic Film: Use 6 mil polyethylene film sheet materials that meet the requirements of ASTM C171.

2. White burlap-polyethylene sheet meeting ASTM C171.

3. Reinforced Curing Paper complying with ASTM C171.

4. Moisture Retaining Fabric: A naturally colored, non-woven, polypropylene fabric with a 4-mil, non-perforated reflective (white) polyethylene coating containing stabilizers to resist degradation from ultraviolet light. Fabric shall exhibit low permeability and high moisture retention. Acceptable manufacturers and products include:

a. PNA Construction Technologies, Inc.: Hydracure S16. b. PNA Construction Technologies, Inc.: Hydracure M5. c. Reef Industries Incorporated: Transguard 4000.

B. Dissipating Resin Curing Compound: Clear, waterborne, membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B shall be composed of hydrocarbon resins and dissipating agents that begin to break down upon exposure to ultraviolet light and traffic approximately 4 to 6 weeks after

01/27/2020 26



application, providing a film that is removable with standard degreasing agents, and mechanized scrubbing actions so as to not impair the later addition of applied finishes. Use only allowed on exterior stoop slabs.

1. Curing compounds used on interior enclosed environments shall be a water-borne product and VOC compliant as required by the U.S. EPA Architectural Coating Rule.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Patching Mortar: Non-shrink, non-slump, non-metallic, quick setting. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

1. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucospeed. 2. BASF Corporation - MasterEmaco N 424. 3. Adhesive Technologies. - Hard Rok Vertipatch. 4. W.R. Meadows - Speed Crete (Red Line). 5. Dayton Superior – Re-Crete 20 minute. 6. SpecChem - Precast Patch.

B. Cement Grout: Mix 1 part Portland cement, 2-1/2 to 3 parts fine aggregate, and enough water for required consistency. Depending on use, consistency may range from mortar consistency to a mixture that will flow under its own weight. Do not mix more than the amount that can be used within 30 minutes. Retempering is not permitted. Use for leveling, preparing setting pads, beds, construction joints (with liquid bonding admixture) and similar uses. Do not use for grouting under bearing plates or structural members in place.

C. Dry-Pack: Mix 1 part Portland cement, 2 parts fine aggregate, and enough water to hydrate cement and provide a mixture that can be molded with the hands into a stable ball (a stiff mix). Do not mix more than the amount that can be used within 30 minutes.

D. Expansion Joint Material: Preformed, resilient, non-extruding asphalt-impregnated fiber conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness of expansion joint material shall be 1/2” unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

E. Magnesium phosphate patching cement specially designed for cold weather grouting and anchoring. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. BASF Corporation - MasterEmaco T545. 2. Euclid Chemical Company - Eucospeed MP.

F. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 15 mils (0.375 mm) thick. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

1. Stego Industries, LLC - Stego Wrap. 2. W.R. Meadows, Inc. - Perminator. 3. Raven Industries - Vapor Block. 4. Insulation Solutions - Viper VaporCheck II.

G. Bonding Agent: “Weld-Crete” manufactured by the Larsen Products Corporation or “Nitobond Acrylic” manufactured by Fosroc Inc., or approved equivalent.

H. Anti-Bonding Agent: “Thompson’s Water Seal” as manufactured by A. E. Thompson, Inc., California or approved equivalent.

01/27/2020 27



I. Control Joint Filler: Flexible, single-component polyurethane sealant with backer rod compliant with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25. Apply sealant per manufacturers written recommendations. Acceptable manufacturers and products:

1. Dayton Superior – Perma 230 SL. 2. Euclid Chemical Company – Eucolastic I. 3. BASF Corporation - MasterSeal SL 1.

2.5 STRENGTH AND PROPERTIES

A. Concrete Mix Designs: Refer to drawings for specified compressive strength. Proportion concrete mixes according to the properties in the following tables. The concrete supplier may produce a mix at a lower water-cement ratio to allow for adjustment of slump at the site by adding water. The addition of site water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94, and the total water-cement ratio shall not exceed the value specified below.

Class

Coarse Aggregate Gradation

Fine Aggregate Gradation

Range of Slump

Max. w/c Air Content

Other Requirements

B 57 or 67 FA 1" to 4" 0.45 5% to 8%

D 57 or 67 FA 4" to 6" 0.50 —

Use water reducing

admixture to achieve slump

specified

E 4 or 57 FA 1" to 4" 0.50 —

Note: w/c = water-cementitious materials ratio.

B. Schedule of Concrete Classes: Provide concrete of the specified class according to the following schedule.

1. Footings: Class E 2. Exterior foundation walls and piers: Class B 3. Interior slabs on grade: Class D 4. Unless noted otherwise: Class B

C. Slump of Superplasticized Concrete: Concrete containing high-range water reducing admixtures (superplasticizer) shall have 8" maximum slump, unless otherwise approved by Structural Engineer.

D. Accelerators: Add non-chloride accelerator to all concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50F only when approved in the mix design. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

E. Water Reducer: Add water reducing admixture or high range water reducing admixtures (superplasticizers) as follows:

1. All pumped concrete. 2. As required for placement or workability. 3. As required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 4. Concrete with water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

F. No other admixtures shall be used unless approved by SEOR.

01/27/2020 28



G. Chlorides: Admixtures or other ingredients including aggregates containing calcium chloride or more than 0.05% chloride ions by weight shall not be used.

H. Workability: Concrete shall have a workability such that it will fill the forms without voids, honeycombs, or rock pockets with proper vibration without permitting materials to separate or excess water to collect on the surface.

I. Concrete Temperatures: Minimum concrete temperature of fresh concrete varies in relation to average air temperature over a 24-hour period as follows:

1. Air temperature below 0F Concrete temperature 70F min. 2. Air temperature 0F to 30F Concrete temperature 65F min. 3. Air temperature 30F to 50F Concrete temperature 50F min. 4. Air temperature above 50F No minimum temperature

The maximum temperature of concrete at the time of delivery shall be 90F. When concrete temperature exceeds 90F, concrete supplier shall attempt to reduce temperature by shading aggregates and cement and cooling mix water. When these methods fail to reduce concrete temperature below 90F, supplier shall use ice in the water to reduce the concrete temperature. Use set retarding admixtures only when approved in the mix design.

J. For integrally colored concrete, add color by weight directly into the mixer along with the aggregate, cement, and water. The pigment amount to be introduced to a batch must be determined by weight alone, not by volume, and by indication in the approved mix design.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

B. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

C. Do not place concrete until data on materials and mix designs have been approved, Architect has been notified, and all other affected trades have coordinated their work.

D. Remove snow, ice, frost, water, mud, and other foreign material from surfaces, reinforcing bars and embedded items against which concrete will be placed.

E. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with sandblasting, steel brush, or water blast to expose aggregate to minimum 1/4” amplitude.

3.2 SLABS

A. Slab on Grade:

1. All interior slabs on grades shall have a polyethylene vapor retarder conforming to ASTM E1745. Lap all joints minimum 6” and seal edges with adhesive tape. Fit vapor retarder around utilities and seal with adhesive tape as required. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Refer to drawings and Section 31 23 00 for required sub-grade preparation beneath slabs on grade.

01/27/2020 29



3. Where vapor retarder is not used below slab on grade, wet sub-grade below slab prior to placing concrete. Subgrade shall be moist with no free water and no muddy or soft spots.

4. Saw cut control joints: Cut with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Control joints shall be located along column lines, with intermediate joints spaced at a maximum distance of 36 times the slab thickness, unless noted otherwise. Control joints shall be continuous, not staggered or offset. Slab panels shall have a maximum length to width ratio of 1.5 to 1. Provide additional control joints at all reentrant or isolated corners formed in the slab on grade. Refer to drawings for typical control joint detail.

5. Provide isolation joints around each column, against grade beams and along foundation walls. Form isolation joints with 1/2" expansion joint material. Extend isolation joint material full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Depress slabs as required for mats architectural finishes, pits and kitchen equipment. Obtain layout and locations from Architect.

7. Verify completion of all under slab work with mechanical and electrical trades before placing slabs.

8. Slope slabs as indicated on drawings and to provide positive drainage. Slope slab keeping bottom level and varying top. Maintain minimum thickness of concrete as indicated on drawings. Refer to floor finishes for tolerances.

C. Embedded Items:

1. The outside diameter of embedded conduit or pipe shall not exceed one-third of the slab thickness in structural slabs, including at crossovers, and shall be placed between the top and bottom reinforcing with a minimum 3” clear cover. Conduit or pipe running parallel to each other shall be spaced at least 8” apart and no more than 2 runs stacked vertically in the slab. Conduit or pipe shall not be embedded in any supported slab less than 6” thick. No embedded conduit or pipe is allowed in any concrete slab-on-steel deck.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Vertical: Locate vertical construction joints in walls and grade beams not farther than a maximum of 100 feet on center. Coordinate joint locations with architectural design.

B. Reinforcing: Stop all welded wire reinforcement and/or reinforcing at construction joint in slabs on grade and provide dowel bars as detailed. Provide reinforcement at other construction joints as detailed. Roughen and thoroughly clean the surface of the concrete, remove all laitance, and wet the surface before placing new concrete against the joint. Slush vertical joints with a neat cement grout before placing new concrete.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place concrete as continuously as possible until placement is complete. Do not place against concrete that has attained initial set, except at authorized joints. If, for any reason, concrete pour is delayed for more than 45 minutes, bulkhead off pour at last acceptable construction joint. Immediately remove excess concrete and clean forms.

B. Do not begin to place concrete during periods of rain, sleet or snow unless adequate protection is provided.

01/27/2020 30



C. No concrete shall be cast onto or against sub-grades containing free water, frost, ice or snow. If earth at bottom of forms has dried out, rewet so the soil is moist, but free of standing water and mud.

D. Notify the architect in advance if concrete is to be pumped.

E. Do not place concrete until all reinforcement is in place, forms have been thoroughly cleaned and approval has been given.

F. Do not accept concrete delivered to the job site more than 90 minutes after initial mixing.

G. Concrete from its point of release to mixers, hoppers, or conveyances, shall not be permitted to drop more than 5 feet (10 feet for concrete containing high range water reducers). Deposit concrete directly into conveyances and directly from conveyances to final points of deposit. Sufficient transportation equipment in good working order shall be on hand before work begins. All conveying equipment must be clean and kept clean during concreting operations. Take every possible precaution to prevent segregation or loss of ingredients.

H. Regulate rate of placement so concrete surface is kept level throughout; a minimum being permitted to flow from one area to another. Use tremie heads spaced at approximately 10-foot intervals for placing concrete in walls. Control rate of placement consistent with form design.

I. Deposit concrete in one continuous operation until section being placed has been completed. For slab thicknesses greater than 12 inches, prevent excessive segregation of aggregate and high temperatures in accordance with ACI 304 and ACI 308. Place concrete in wall forms in layers not greater than 12 inches in depth, each layer being compacted by internal vibration before succeeding layer is placed.

J. Place concrete as near as possible to its final position to prevent segregation or loss of materials. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Consolidate concrete in walls, columns, beams and slabs or joist construction thicker than 8" with internal vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 VPM). Slabs less than 8" thick may be consolidated with internal vibrators (9,000 to 13,500 VPM) or vibrating screeds supported on forms, boards or rails, approved by SEOR, supplement vibration by forking or spading by hand along surfaces adjacent to forms and construction joints. Be sure an adequate number of operating vibrator units are on hand to properly consolidate quantity of concrete to be placed, including spares for emergency use.

1. Vertically insert and remove handheld vibrators at constant intervals 18 to 30 inches apart. Vibrate concrete the maximum amount and time required for complete consolidation, without segregation, and release of entrapped air bubbles, but in no instance exceed 15 seconds per square foot of exposed surface.

K. Place concrete during daylight hours, unless permitted otherwise by the SEOR.

L. Re-tempering of concrete shall not be permitted. Concrete that has stood more than 15 minutes after leaving the mixer shall be discarded.

M. Exercise care in placing concrete over waterproof membranes, rigid insulation and/or protection boards to avoid damaging those materials. Report damage immediately, and do not proceed until damage is repaired.

N. Remove loose debris from hardened surfaces of previous pours by sandblasting surfaces and expose clean coarse aggregate firmly embedded in mortar matrix.

O. Protect existing concrete work to be exposed to view and other finished materials from damage and staining resulting from concreting operations. Handle concrete carefully to avoid dripping and spillage.

01/27/2020 31



Remove spilled concrete from existing surfaces immediately. Covering sills, ledges, and other surfaces with protective coverings may be necessary to protect the work.

P. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.

Q. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor rods for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.5 CONCRETE FINISHES AND TOLERANCES

A. Exposed Smooth Formed Surfaces: Remove forms and perform necessary repairs and patch to produce surface finish-3.0 as specified in ACI 301. Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete exposed to view in the finished work. Confirm finishes with architect prior to concrete placement by submitting shop drawings indicating locations of all types of finishes.

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES AND TOLERANCES

A. Trowel Finish:

1. Screed concrete to an even plane, float, then power trowel the surface.

2. Hand trowel the surface smooth and free of trowel marks. Continue hand troweling until a ringing sound is produced as the floor is troweled.

3. Provide trowel finish as indicated on the drawings and at the following locations:

a. Concrete floors exposed in finished work unless otherwise indicated. b. Slabs to receive curing compounds and sealers. c. Slabs to receive resilient flooring or carpet.

B. Fine Broom Finish:

1. Screed concrete to an even plane, float, then power trowel the surface. Provide fine hair broom finish perpendicular to slope, free of loose particles, ridges, projections, voids and concrete droppings.

2. Provide fine broom finish as indicated on the drawings and at the following locations:

a. Stoop slabs. b. Raised curbs and walkway areas. c. Slabs to receive thin set ceramic tile.

01/27/2020 32



C. Broom Finish:

1. Screed concrete to an even plane and then float. Immediately after concrete has received a floated finish, give the concrete surface a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a coarse broom across the surface.

2. Provide as indicated on the drawings and at the following locations:

a. ADA ramp slabs. b. Exterior walkway slabs.

D. Float Finish:

1. Screed concrete to an even plane then float.

2. Provide as indicated on the drawings and at the following locations:

a. Slabs to directly receive concrete topping. b. Roof slabs to receive loose laid roof insulation.

E. Floor Finish Tolerances: Floor finish tolerances as measured in accordance with ASTM E1155, Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System (Inch Pound Units), shall be as follows:

Floor Profile Quality Classification

Minimum Flatness Number Required Test Area Minimum Local F-Number

Flatness FF Level FL Flatness FF Level FL Slab on Grade 35 25 21 15

F. Slab Drainage: Finish all concrete slabs to proper elevations to ensure that all surface moisture will drain freely to floor drains, and that no puddle areas exist. Contractor shall bear the cost of corrections to provide positive drainage.

G. Special Tolerances for Concrete Slabs: No abrupt change in vertical elevation of 1/4" or more is acceptable at the interface between slabs and within areas where pedestrian traffic is expected:

3.7 CONCRETE CURING

A. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot temperatures.

B. Concrete other than high-early strength shall be maintained above 50F and in a moist condition for at least the first 7 days after placement, except when special curing is used. Special curing procedures shall not be used without written permission from the SEOR.

C. Formed surfaces shall be cured by leaving the formwork in place during the curing period.

D. Protect concrete from excessive changes in temperature during the curing period and at the termination of the curing process. Changes in the temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5F in any one hour or 50F in any 24-hour period.

E. Protect concrete from injury from the elements until full strength is developed. Protect from mechanical injury.

F. During cold weather construction, all footings shall be protected from frost penetration until the building is enclosed and temporary heat is provided.

01/27/2020 33



3.8 SLAB CURING

A. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Use one of the methods described below.

B. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing for Concrete Floors Not Exposed in Final Condition: Cover concrete surface with waterproof sheet material as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by covering. The cover shall be placed flat on the concrete surface, avoiding wrinkles. Sprinkle concrete with water as necessary during application of covering. Place in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Verify that the concrete is continuously wet under the sheets; otherwise, add water through soaker hoses under the sheets. Weight down covering to prevent displacement. Immediately repair any holes or tears during the curing period using polyethylene sheet and waterproof tape. Curing process shall be maintained for a minimum of 7 days.

C. Moisture-Retaining-Fabric Curing for Concrete Floors to Remain Exposed: Cover concrete surface with moisture retaining fabric as soon as finishing operations are complete and the concrete is sufficiently hard to be undamaged by covering. The cover shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations, in largest practical widths. Wet the slab to rejection, then thoroughly wet fabric side of cover and install with poly side up. Lap over adjacent covers a minimum of 18”. Wet all laps and outside edges to prevent displacement and to ensure intimate contact with concrete and adjacent covers. Rewet as necessary and protect covers from damage during curing process.

1. After minimum 7-day cure, remove moisture retaining fabric in sections.

2. A maximum of 3,500 square feet of concrete curing cover may be removed at any one time. At no time shall the exposed area be permitted to dry prior to completion of the floor scrubbing process.

3. Using a high-powered floor scrubber capable of a minimum 80 pounds head pressure, and a mild citrus-based detergent that does not damage or mar the surface in any way, scrub the floor to remove any minerals or soluble salts that may have accumulated at the floor surface. Rinse area thoroughly with clean fresh water. Remove water and allow floor to dry. If whitening occurs during drying, repeat scrubbing process before floor dries until no whitening occurs during drying.

4. All areas of the floor shall remain wet during floor scrubbing process. Expose only the amount of floor surface that can be cleaned before any drying occurs without exceeding the maximum allowable exposed area.

D. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by low pressure spray equipment or roller as soon as finishing operations are complete, free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen can be seen. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Verify compatibility of the curing compound with paint, finishes, or toppings that require positive bond to the concrete. If curing compound is not compatible with paint finishes or toppings, utilize a dissipating curing compound and remove in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Use of curing compound only allowed at exterior stoop slabs.

01/27/2020 34



3.9 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Definition: Cold weather shall be defined as a period when for more than three successive days the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40F. The average daily temperature is the average of the highest and lowest temperature during the period from midnight to midnight. When temperatures above 50F occur during more than half of any 24-hour duration, the period shall not be regarded as cold weather.

B. All cast-in-place concrete work occurring during cold weather shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306.1, “Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting”, published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by the contract documents or this specification.

C. Planning: The General Contractor, concrete contractor, concrete supplier and the architect shall have a pre-construction conference to outline the cold weather concreting operations concerning the placing, finishing, curing and protection of the concrete during cold weather. Pre-construction conference shall occur before cold weather is expected to occur.

D. Detailed procedure submittal: Concrete contractor shall prepare and submit for review detailed procedures for the production, transportation placement, protection, curing and temperature monitoring of concrete during cold weather. Include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions. Do not begin cold weather concreting until these procedures have been reviewed and approved.

E. Mixing: Concrete flatwork poured in cold weather shall be proportioned to obtain a lower slump to minimize the amount of bleed water during finishing. All bleed water should be skimmed off flatwork prior to troweling. Concrete that will be exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing while saturated should be properly air entrained as outlined in this specification.

F. Protection of Concrete: Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 72 hours, unless approved by the structural engineer. The protection period may be reduced according to ACI 306.1 requirements. Concrete contractor shall submit a letter of request to reduce the protection period, by outlining the method used to achieve the reduction per ACI 306.1.

1. When practical for the construction schedule, formwork shall be insulated and remain in place for at least the required protection period.

G. Concrete Temperatures: The minimum temperature of concrete immediately after placement shall be as specified in the following table.

Mixing Temperatures Section

Size Minimum temperature of concrete as placed

and maintained during the protection

period

Maximum gradual decrease in surface temperature during any 24 hours after

the end of the protection.

Above 30F

0 to 30F

Below 0F

< 12 in 55F 50F 60F 65F 70F

12-36 in 50F 40F 55F 60F 65F

36-72 in 50F 30F 50F 55F 60F

> 72 in 50F 20F 45F 50F 55F

01/27/2020 35



H. Mixing Temperatures: As the ambient air temperature decreases the concrete mixing temperature shall be increased to compensate for the heat lost in the period between mixing and placement. The concrete supplier shall use one or both of the following methods for increasing the concrete temperature.

1. Heating the mixing water to a temperature necessary to offset the temperature losses during transport. Supplier shall not heat water to temperatures in excess of 140F, without taking special precautions as outlined in ACI 306.

2. Heating the aggregate with a circulated steam piping system.

I. Temperature measurements: The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring and recording the concrete temperatures during placement and throughout the protection period.

1. Inspection personnel shall keep a record of the date, time, outside air temperature, temperature of concrete as placed, and weather conditions.

2. Temperature of the concrete and the outside air shall be recorded at regular intervals but not less than twice in a 24-hour period. The record shall include temperatures at several points within the enclosure and on the concrete surface of sufficient frequency to determine a range of temperatures.

3. Inspection agency shall submit the temperature logs to the Architect for permanent job records.

3.10 HOT WEATHER PROTECTION

A. Definition: Hot weather shall be defined as any combination of high ambient temperature, low relative humidity, high winds and intense solar radiation that leads to higher than usual evaporation. The table below defines low relative humidity based on air temperature. For a given air temperature, if the relative humidity is equal to or less than the specified minimum, provisions for hot weather concreting shall be as follows:

Air Temperature Minimum Relative Humidity 105F 90% 100F 80% 95F 70% 90F 60% 85F 50% 80F 40% 75F 30%

B. Scheduling: When hot weather is expected, adjust concrete placement schedules to avoid placing or finishing during the period from noon until 3:00 pm. When possible, slab pours should be delayed until the building is enclosed to protect the concrete from wind and direct sunlight, Construction schedule shall account for 7-day moist curing period.

C. Mixing: Concrete supplier shall adjust mix designs and admixtures to minimize slump loss. Concrete shall be mixed at a water-cement, which is lower than the specified maximum to allow for the adjustment of slump by addition of water in the field. Water reduction shall be accomplished without reducing initial slump by increasing dosage of water reducing admixture.

D. Preparation: Do not order concrete earlier than is required to avoid delays. Cool forms, subgrades and reinforcing bars with water spray from fog nozzle prior to concrete placement.

E. Delivery: Site traffic shall be coordinated and delivery times scheduled to minimize waiting times for concrete trucks.

01/27/2020 36



F. Placement: Preparations shall be made to place and consolidate the concrete at the fastest possible rate. Maintain a continuous flow of concrete to the job site to avoid development of cold joints, during placement of slabs, apply fog spray to prevent moisture loss without causing surplus water to stand on concrete surface.

G. Finishing: Finish concrete as fast as practical. Continue fogging concrete during finishing. Where fogging is not possible, apply sprayable moisture-retaining film between finishing passes.

H. Curing: Formed concrete shall be covered with a waterproof material to retain moisture. Flat work shall be moisture cured as described in this specification. Moist curing shall continue for at least 7 days.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Independent Testing Agency and Special Inspector shall each perform their prescribed inspection, sampling, and testing services as described in Part 1 of this specification section.

B. In cases where samples have not been taken or tests conducted as specified or strength of laboratory test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet requirements of ACI 301, for evaluation of concrete strength, Structural Engineer shall have the right to order compressive or flexural test specimens or both be taken from the hardened concrete according to ASTM C42, load tests according to ACI 318, or such other tests as may be necessary to clearly establish the strength of the in situ concrete, and such tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. Where cores have been cut from work, Contractor shall fill void with dry-pack and patch the finish the match the adjacent existing surfaces.

3.12 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS

A. All repair of defective areas shall be made, with prior approval of Architect and SEOR as to method and procedure, in accordance with Section 5 of ACI 301, except specified bonding compound must be used. Cosmetic repairs of minor defects in exposed concrete surfaces shall be in a manner acceptable to the Architect. Defective areas shall be deemed when:

1. Tests on core or prism specimens fail to show specified strengths. 2. Not formed as indicated or detailed. 3. Not plumb or level where so indicated or required to receive subsequent work. 4. Not true to intended grades and levels. 5. Cut, filled, or resurfaces, unless under direction of the SEOR. 6. Debris is embedded therein. 7. Not fully in conformance with provisions of the drawings. 8. Damaged by hot or cold weather conditions. 9. Mixing time exceeds 90 minutes from ready-mix plant to the time of deposit.

B. Patch form tie holes at the following locations:

1. Unfinished exposed concrete (not scheduled for painting, plus at board formed concrete finish).

2. All other areas: Prime voids with bonding compound and fill with patching mortar. Strike flush without overlap, float to uniform texture to match adjacent surfaces.

3. Exposed areas scheduled for spray texture:

a. Remove projections and protrusions: 1/16" or larger. b. Remove continuous ridges 1/32" or larger. c. Fill voids and pin holes.

01/27/2020 37



4. Exposed areas scheduled for paint or epoxy:

a. Remove projections, ridges, and other protrusions 1/32" or larger. b. Fill voids and pin holes 1/16" or larger.

5. Exposed areas not scheduled for paint or other finishes:

a. Remove projections, ridges and other protrusions not conforming to requirements specified under Section 03 10 00.

b. Fill voids and pin holes not conforming to requirements specified under Section 03 10 00.

C. All structural repairs shall be made, with prior approval of the Architect/Engineer, as to method and procedure, using the specified epoxy adhesive and/or epoxy mortar.

D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations.

01/27/2020 38



Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

3.13 CEMENT GROUT AND DRY-PACK

A. Cement Grout: Thoroughly mix sufficient quantities to avoid combining different batches of grout mix. Ensure that grout completely fills all spaces and voids. Level, screed, or cut flush excess grout to produce smooth, neat, even exposed surfaces.

B. Dry-Pack: Thoroughly blend dry ingredients prior to mixing with water. Forcibly pack mixture to complete fill voids and spaces.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed concrete to remove laitance, efflorescence and stains.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 39


SECTION 05 12 23 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 23 - 1

DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05 12 23 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work shall include, but not be limited to the following items:

1. Structural steel 2. Base and bearing plates. 3. Deck support angles and framing for roof openings. 4. Steel lintel members for masonry openings. 5. Edge angles and bent plates. 6. Connection plates. 7. Shear stud connectors. 8. All other steel items as listed in AISC – “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and

Bridges” as shown on structural and architectural drawings.

B. Work shall also include grouting of all structural steel members where indicated.

C. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding structural steel framing should be considered a part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joists. D. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck. E. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Where any provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern.

1. AISC - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts. 2. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges. 3. AISC 360-10 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 4. ASTM A6 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars,

Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. 5. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 6. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless. 7. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 8. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. 9. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 10. ASTM A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High

Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

01/27/2020 40



11. ASTM A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use.

12. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

13. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 14. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium

Structural Steel. 15. ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Steel Shapes. 16. ASTM A1085 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural

Sections (HSS). 17. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 18. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide to Radiographic Examination Using Industrial Radiographic Film. 19. ASTM E165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry. 20. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing. 21. ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 22. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators

for Use with Structural Fasteners. 23. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield

Strength. 24. ASTM F3125 - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel,

Heat Treated, 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch Dimensions. 25. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 26. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.







a. Perform all testing and inspection required per approved testing and inspection program.



01/27/2020 41




AISC 360 – CHAPTER N: STRUCTURAL STEEL QUALITY ASSURANCE O – Observe these items on a random basis. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections. P – Perform these tasks for each welded joint or member.

Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding

Welding procedure specifications (WPSs) available P

Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available P

Material identification (type / grade) O

Fit-up of groove welds (including joint geometry) • Joint preparation • Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) • Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) • Tacking (tack weld quality and location) • Backing type and fit (if applicable)

O

Configuration and finish of access holes O

Fit-up of fillet welds • Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root) • Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) • Tacking (tack weld quality and location)

O

Inspection Tasks During Welding

Use of qualified welders O

Control and handling of welding consumables • Packaging • Exposure Control

O

No welding over cracked tack welds O

Environmental conditions • Wind speed within limits • Precipitation and temperature

O

WPS followed • Settings on welding equipment • Travel speed • Selected welding materials • Shielding gas type / flow rate • Preheat applied • Interpass temperature maintained (min. / max.) • Proper position (F,V,H, OH)

O

Welding techniques • Interpass and final cleaning • Each pass within profile limitations • Each pass meets quality requirements

O

Inspection Tasks After Welding

Welds cleaned O

Size, length, and location of welds P

Welds meets visual acceptance criteria • Crack prohibition • Weld / base-metal fusion • Crater cross section

P

01/27/2020 42




• Weld profiles • Weld size • Undercut • Porosity

Arc strikes P

k-area: when welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the k-area, visually inspect the web k-area for cracks within 3 inches of the weld

P

Backing removed and weld tabs removed and finished (if required) P

Repair activities P

Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member P

Nondestructive Testing of Welded Joints

For structures in Risk Category II, ultrasonic testing shall be performed on 10% of CJP groove welds subject to transversely applied tension loading in butt, T- and corner joints, in materials 5/16 in. thick or greater. Refer to AISC 360-10, section N.5f for increase in the rate of ultrasonic testing.

Thermally cut surfaces of access holes shall be tested using magnetic particle testing or penetrant testing, when the flange thickness exceeds 2 inches for rolled shapes or when the web thickness exceeds 2 inches for built-up shapes. Any crack shall be deemed unacceptable.

Welded joint subjected to fatigue shall be tested by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection. The reduction rate of ultrasonic testing is prohibited.

Inspection Tasks Prior to Bolting

Manufacturer’s certifications available for fastener materials P

Fasteners marked in accordance with ASTM requirements O

Proper fasteners selected for the joint detail (grade, type, bolt length if threads are to be excluded from shear plane)

O

Proper bolting procedure selected for joint detail O

Connecting elements, including the appropriate faying surface condition and hole preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements

O

Pre-installation verification testing by installation personnel observed and documented for fastener assemblies and methods used

O

Proper storage provided for bolts, nuts, washers and other fastener components O

Inspection Tasks During Bolting

Fastener assemblies, of suitable condition, placed in all holes and washers (if required) are positioned as required.

O

Joint brought to the snug condition, placed in all holes and washers (if required) are positioned as required O Fastener component not turned by the wrench prevented from rotating O

Fasteners are pretensioned in accordance with RCSC Specification, progressing systematically from the most rigid point toward the free edges

O

Inspection Tasks After Bolting

Document acceptance or rejection of bolted connections P

01/27/2020 43




Other Inspection Tasks

Inspection during the placement of anchor rods and other embedments supporting structural steel. As a minimum, the diameter, grade, type and length of anchor rod or embedded item, and the extent or depth of embedment into the concrete shall be verified.

P

Inspect the fabricated steel or erected steel frame to verify compliance with the details shown on the construction documents, such as braces, stiffeners, member locations and proper application of joint details at each connection.

O

Inspection of Steel Elements of Composite Construction Prior to Concrete Placement Placement and installation of steel deck P

Placement and installation of steel headed stud anchors P

Document acceptance or rejection of steel elements P

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabrication, Erection, and Welding Qualifications:

1. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specification for the design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings.

2. All welding of structural steel shall be performed by operators who have been recently qualified as prescribed in “Qualification Procedures” of the American Welding Society (AWS).

3. Tolerances: Tolerances shall be as indicated by the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges, except that tolerances for fabricating, rolling, cambering and erection shall not be cumulative.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Prepare and submit complete erection and detailed shop drawings for Engineer’s approval, including framing plans indicating size, weight and location of all structural members. Shop drawings shall indicate methods of connecting, anchoring, fastening, bracing and attaching work of other trades.

a. Where contract documents indicate verify in field (VIF) dimensions, shop drawings shall indicate these dimensions and Contractor shall note that the dimensions have been verified.

b. This specification modifies AISC Code of Standard Practice by deleting the following sentence from 4.4.1(c): “Release by the Owner’s Designated Representatives for Design and Construction for the Fabricator to begin fabrication using the approved submittals.” Review of the shop drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the fabricator of this responsibility.

2. Furnish both the Engineer and Architect with one copy of the following:

a. Final shop drawings containing all review notations. b. Field Use/For Construction drawings.

01/27/2020 44



3. The steel fabricator shall submit a setting plan for all embedded items for Engineer’s approval.

4. Welder’s Certification: Submit certification for all welders employed on the project demonstrating they have been AWS qualified to perform the welding procedures required for this project.

5. General Contractor/Construction Manager to provide copies of field concrete cylinder breaks indicating the concrete meets 75% of the design compressive strength to the steel erector.

B. The General Contractor shall conduct a field survey of as-built anchors and bearing plate locations and elevations prior to steel erection. Survey shall be furnished to the steel fabricator. Contractor shall identify deviations from approved shop drawings and submit proposed repairs and modifications to the Engineer and steel fabricator for approval.

C. Product Data:

1. Certified copies of material test reports, commonly called mill test reports, for all structural steel used on the project. Material test reports shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A6, shall cover chemical and physical properties, and shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the fabricator.

2. Manufacturer specifications, certifications, and installation recommendations for the following products, including laboratory test reports and other data required to prove compliance with these specifications:

a. High strength bolts, including nuts and washers. b. Unfinished bolts and nuts

3. The Contractor shall submit written procedures for the pre-installation testing, installation, snugging, pretensioning, and post-installation inspection of fasteners. The procedure(s) shall meet all requirements of the RCSC specification and the drawings. Procedures need to be submitted only for the method(s) of installation to be used by the Contractor, which may include the turn-of-nut, calibrated wrench, twist-off type tension control bolt, and direct tension indicator methods.

4. Shear Connectors: Contractor shall submit the following:

a. Certifications that the studs, as supplied, meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, Sections 7.2 and 7.3.

b. Certified copies of the stud manufacturer’s test reports covering the last completed set of in-plant quality control mechanical tests for the diameter supplied.

c. Certified material test reports from the steel supplier indicating diameter, chemical properties, and grade on each heat number supplied.

d. Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor.


A. Steel members shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will avoid any damage or deformation. Materials should be stored to allow easy access for inspection and identification. Bent or deformed members will be rejected and shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the responsible party. Store clear of the ground and in such a manner as to eliminate excessive handling.

B. Store fasteners in a protected location. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts before use.

01/27/2020 45



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel:

1. All structural steel shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. All structural steel shall meet the latest minimum requirements as follows:

a. Structural steel wide flange shapes shall:

1) Conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings, unless noted otherwise.

b. Structural steel angles, channels, bars, plates, and miscellaneous shall conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings.

1) Shapes of ASTM A572, Grade 50, mill certified to AISC Technical Bulletin #3 requirements, may be substituted for A992 with approval from the Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR).

2) Grade 50 steel shall have a minimum yield stress of 50 ksi and the yield stress, Fy, that is reported from tests shall be based on the yield strength definition in ASTM A370, using the offset method at 0.002 strain.

c. Square and rectangular structural tubing shall be cold formed conforming to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings.

d. Round structural tubing shall be cold formed conforming to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings.

e. Steel pipe shall conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings.

B. High Strength Structural Bolts:

1. High strength structural bolts shall conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings.

2. High strength bolts shall be detailed and installed in accordance with AISC - “Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts.”

3. Manufacturer’s symbol and grade markings shall appear on all bolts and nuts.

C. Anchoring Devices:

1. Anchor Rods: Anchor rods used with structural steel members shall be plain threaded rods conforming to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings.

2. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors shall consist of one-piece wedge type carbon steel anchors with heavy-duty nuts and washers. All components shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633. Refer to the drawing details and General Notes for the expansion anchors used as the basis of design and the acceptable alternates

01/27/2020 46



3. Adhesive Anchoring System: Adhesive anchoring system shall consist of a threaded anchor rod complete with nut and washer and the adhesive cartridge. Refer to the drawing details and General Notes for the adhesive anchoring systems used as the basis of design and the acceptable alternates.

a. Nuts shall meet ASTM A563, Grade DH, and washers shall meet ASTM F436.

b. All components shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC1.

c. Adhesive shall consist of a two-part acrylic based adhesive applied in a dual cartridge dispensing system that properly mixes the components at the point of application.

D. Welding Materials:

1. Type required for material being welded in conformance with AWS D1.1.

E. Stud Connectors:

1. For threaded studs that are being used to connect steel beams to embed plates, use ASTM A108, Type A, Grades 1010 through 1020 forged steel, headed uncoated with a minimum tensile strength of 61,000 psi. Fabricated within the tolerances set forth in AWS D1.1.

2. Studs applied by means of the electric arc welding process and shall use an arc shield ferrules of heat resistant ceramic.

F. Galvanizing: Where indicated on the drawings, steel shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process after fabrication conforming to ASTM A123. All exterior steel that will remain exposed shall be galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Paints and Primers:

1. Fabricator’s standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. 2. Galvanizing repair paint: SSPC Paint 20. 3. Refer to Specification Section 09 90 00 for additional paint requirements.

H. Non-Shrink Grout for Base and Bearing Plates: Non-shrink grout, conforming to ASTM C1107, shall be pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sand, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents. All constituents shall meet the requirements of these specifications. Minimum compressive strength at 28-days shall be 7,000 psi as determined by ASTM C109. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for handling, mixing, placing and curing. Acceptable products are:

1. Euclid Chemical Company - Euco N.S. Grout 2. L&M Construction Chemical - Crystex. 3. Master Builders - Masterflow 713. 4. Sonneborn - Sonnogrout. 5. Five Star Products Inc. – Five Star Grout. 6. Dayton Superior - Sure-Grip High Performance Grout. 7. Dayton Superior – 1107 Advantage Grout.

01/27/2020 47




A. Fabrication Procedures (non-AESS):

1. Fabricate all structural steel items in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the approved shop drawings.

2. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

3. Properly mark materials for field assembly and location for which intended. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize handling of materials.

4. Complete structural steel assemblies before shop priming or galvanizing.

B. Shop Connections:

1. All shop connections shall be welded, unless noted otherwise on drawings. Connections shall develop the full strength of the adjoining members unless detailed otherwise.

2. All holes shall be either drilled or punched, as no burning of holes will be permitted, including the enlargement of holes. Provide all holes required for connections and for attaching the work of other trades where such holes are shown if furnished prior to fabrication.

3. Connections shall be detailed as standard framed beam connections (bearing type) in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design. Connections which require oversized holes or slotted holes in which the force is other than normal to the axis of the slot shall be detailed as “Slip-Critical Connections” and noted as such on the erection drawings. Provide bearing plates and end anchorage for beams resting on masonry.

4. All full and partial penetration welds shall be fully detailed on the shop drawings. Use backing for all full penetration welds.

5. Weld access holes shall be fabricated in accordance with the recommendations of AWS D1.1 and AISC Specification.

C. Shear Connectors:

1. Steel stud shear connectors shall be securely welded in the field to structural steel beams as detailed on the drawings. Welds shall be such that the shear connector stud will deform before weld failure occurs. Welding shall be done in accordance with AWS D1.1.

2. Shear stud connector for embedded plates and angles shall be welded in the fabrication shop in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Deck support framing and seats: Furnish all miscellaneous framing necessary to fully support the roof and floor steel decking.

E. Shop Priming:

1. Unless noted otherwise below, structural steel shall not be shop primed.

2. The following are steel surfaces to receive shop priming:

a. Surfaces exposed and to be painted per Architect’s drawings.

01/27/2020 48



3. If the steel pieces are to be shop primed, the following surfaces are exceptions to shop priming:

a. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

b. Surfaces to be field welded. c. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. d. Top flanges of beams supporting composite steel decking. e. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. f. Galvanized surfaces.

4. Surface Preparation: Clean Surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

a. SSPC-SP3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”

5. Priming: Apply primer in accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations, and at a rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

F. Finished Paint System:

1. Finished paint coats shall be in accordance with paint manufacturer’s recommendations, and specification Division 9.

2. Paint shall be free of sags, runs, drips or other defects. Allow ample drying time before handling to prevent damage to coatings.

3. Strip paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

4. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that will be inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of the second coat to distinguish it from the first.

G. Galvanizing:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply Zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123.

a. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing.

b. Unless otherwise noted on drawings or in Division 9, all exterior steel components exposed to the elements shall be galvanized, including, but not limited to, lintels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

01/27/2020 49



3.2 ERECTION

A. Erection Procedures:

1. The erector and not the SEOR shall be responsible for the means, methods and safety of erection of the structural steel framing.

2. Erection of all structural steel items shall meet the requirements of AISC “Specification and Code of Standard Practice.”

3. All work shall be erected square, plumb, straight and true, accurately fitted and with tight joints and intersections, by mechanics experienced in the erection of structural steel. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.

4. Clean the bearing surface and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly.

5. All base plates shall be supported on steel wedges, steel shims or heavy duty leveling nuts until the supported members have been leveled and plumbed.

a. Snug tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumb. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate before packing with grout.

b. Promptly place non-shrink grout between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

6. Field connections of structural work shall be made with either high strength bolts (bearing type) or by welding. Proper precaution shall be taken to ensure that anchored items will not be distorted or overstressed due to improperly fabricated items.

7. Splice members only where indicated unless, with the SEOR’s approval, splices not indicated would result in lower costs due to reduced shipping expense. For splices not indicated, submit structural calculations prepared under direct supervision of and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.

8. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by the Engineer/Architect in writing.

9. Steel erection shall not proceed without concrete in footings, piers, and walls attaining 75% of the intended minimum compressive design strength. Documentation must be provided indicating compliance with this requirement.

B. Surveys:

1. Establish permanent benchmarks necessary for accurate erection of structural steel.

2. Check elevations of concrete surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar items, before erection proceeds.

01/27/2020 50



C. Bracing and Protection:

1. Steel shall be well plumbed, leveled and braced to prevent any movement.

a. Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary guying of steel frame to resist safely all wind and construction loads during erection and to assure proper alignment of all parts of the steel frame.

2. Provide all temporary flooring, bracing, shoring and guards necessary to prevent damage or injury. All partially erected steel shall be secured in an approved manner during interruptions of work.

D. Anchor and Foundation Rods:

1. All anchor or foundation rods and similar steel items to be built into concrete or masonry are to be set by the concrete or masonry contractors and shall be furnished promptly so that they may be built in as the work progresses because cutting of structural steel members to accommodate errors pertaining to embedded items will not be permitted.

3.3 FIELD WELDING

A. Welding Procedures:

1. All field welding shall be in accordance with AISC Specifications and conform to AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code - Steel”.

a. Comply with AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

b. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice” for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for mill material.

2. Contractor shall remove ceramic ferrules from shear connectors in sufficient time to allow for inspection of welds prior to placement of the concrete.

3.4 REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND TOUCH UP

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings and on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Touch up Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field welds, final connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates and abutting structural steel.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP3 power-tool cleaning.

2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

3. Secure approval by the Architect prior to field painting.

01/27/2020 51



3.5 GROUTING

A. Grouting under structural framing members shall be completed after all members have been plumbed and braced and before imposed loads are placed thereon.

B. Remove all defective concrete, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign matter from surfaces to which grout will be placed.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND STEEL LINTELS

A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel as detailed in architectural and structural drawings.

B. The steel fabricator shall furnish all steel lintels required for masonry wall construction indicated in the architectural and structural drawings and schedules.

C. Provide additional steel framing for continuous support of steel deck edges at openings and column interruptions.

D. All exterior exposed steel shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 painted in accordance with Division 9 after fabrication.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 52


SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOISTS 05 21 00 - 1

DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOISTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fabrication and erection of open web steel joists. Work shall include but not be limited to, the following items:

1. K-series joists. 2. Joist substitutes. 3. Bridging. 4. Joist anchors and connections.

B. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding steel joists shall be considered a part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 04 22 00 - Reinforced Unit Masonry. D. Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel. E. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Where any provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern.

1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Buildings and Bridges. 2. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 5. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod

60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Structural Steel. 7. ASTM F3125 - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and

Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch Dimensions.

8. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 9. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.

01/27/2020 53













Open-Web Steel Joists Con

tinuo

us

Perio

dic

Referenced Standard

Installation of open-web steel joists.

End connections - welding or bolted X SJI Specifications listed in Section

2207.1 Bridging - horizontal or diagonal

1. Standard bridging X SJI Specifications listed in Section

2207.1 2. Bridging that differs from the SJI specifications listed in

Section 2207.1.

X

01/27/2020 54




A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten (10) years documented experience. Fabrication company shall be certified by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) to manufacture joists complying with the SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables.

B. Manufacturer shall assume responsibility for engineering special joists indicated on the drawings to comply with the SJI standard specification performance requirements. This responsibility includes the preparation of shop drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Structural Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare and submit shop and erection drawings for Engineer’s approval.

B. Shop drawings:

1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, location of joists, joist chord extensions.

2. Joining and anchorage details of attachment to other construction.

3. Size, location and configuration of all code required bridging, bracing and connections.

4. Joist cambers.

5. Type of paint and shop primer.

6. Dimensions verifying that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Welder’s Certificates: Submit certification for all welders employed on the project demonstrating they have been AWS qualified to perform the welding procedures required for this project.


A. All joists and accessories shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner, which will prevent any damage or deformation. Damaged joists shall not be erected or repaired without Structural Engineer’s approval. Joists shall be stored clear of the ground in such a manner so as to eliminate excessive handling and protect from weather with a weatherproof covering.

B. Deliver and store all joists and accessories to the site according to all SJI requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Bar Joists: Steel used in the manufacture of bar joists shall be as allowed by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) standard specification for chord and web members.

01/27/2020 55



B. High Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM F3125, Grade A325, Type 1 heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon steel nuts, and hardened carbon steel washers. Finish shall be plain, uncoated.

C. Carbon Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, carbon steel, hex head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon steel nuts; and flat unhardened steel washers. Finish shall be plain, uncoated.

D. Miscellaneous items, such as bridging, headers, bolts, nuts, washers, anchors and all other appurtenances for a complete metal joist installation shall be furnished as a part of the work of this section.

E. Primer: Provide the manufacturer’s standard shop primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion and complying with the performance requirements specified in the SJI “Standard Specification” previously cited.

1. Do not prime paint joists and accessories scheduled to receive spray applied fireproofing.

2. Contractor shall certify compatibility of shop primer coat with field applied paint finishes or fireproofing required for this project.

F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.


A. Manufacture K-Series steel joists according to “Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series,” in SJI “Specifications,” with steel angle top and bottom chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chords; of joist type indicated.

B. All steel joists shall consist of an electrically welded open-web type, designed and fabricated to conform to the “Standard Specifications” included in the SJI or AISC publications cited above and shall be manufactured by a current member of the Steel Joist Institute.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. General Contractor shall coordinate this information and provide the manufacturer with drawings outlining the location of any required holes.

D. Bridging members for open web joists, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be continuous wall to wall, complete with suitable anchorage at each end, all in accordance with SJI “Standard Specifications”.

E. Design and fabricate joists and bridging to support a minimum net uplift as indicated on the drawings. A 1/3 stress increase shall not be used in uplift design.

F. Camber joists in accordance with SJI Standard Specification or as indicated.

G. All steel joists including all accessories, before leaving the shop shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, rust and foreign matter and shall be given one (1) coat of primer complying with the performance requirements specified in the SJI “Standard Specification” previously cited.

01/27/2020 56



H. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated on the drawings. Top chord extensions shall be SJI’s Type S.

I. Provide extended bearing ends of joists with SJI’s Type R extended ends where indicated on the drawings.

2.3 CLEANING, PRIMING AND PAINTING

A. Clean joist by using solvent cleaning, SSPC-SP 1 to remove oil and grease.

B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous dry film thickness of not less than 1 mil.

C. Painting of joists and joist accessories is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Erection of all steel joist items shall meet the applicable requirements of the SJI “Standard Specifications” previously cited.

B. All anchor bolts, wall anchors, bridging anchors, bearing plates and similar items to be built into concrete or masonry are to be set by the concrete or masonry contractors and shall be furnished promptly so that they may be built-in as the work progresses as no cutting for the same afterward will be permitted. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.

C. All steel joists shall be accurately set to the lines, elevations and dimensions indicated on the approved shop drawings.

D. Bridging shall be installed concurrently with joist erection and before loads are applied. Bridging shall be securely welded to joist chords in a manner that will not damage joist members and so as to insure positive resistance to both tensile and compressive stresses. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.

E. All joists bearing on concrete or masonry shall bear on a steel bearing plate and joists bearing on steel shall be welded to the supporting steel.

F. All field welding shall be in accordance with AWS previously cited.

G. All construction loads shall be kept off joists until they are permanently anchored and bridged. During construction, care shall be taken to avoid excessive concentrated or moving loads. Provide for adequate distribution of any such loads so that the carrying capacity of the joists is not exceeded.

H. Joist shall not be positioned any greater than 1/4 inch from true alignment and shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from plumb.

01/27/2020 57



3.2 FIELD TOUCH UP

A. Immediately after erection, Contractor shall touch up all erection bolts, all field welds and all scratched or abraded areas and paint out erection markings with matching rust-inhibitive primer in color and formulation to match shop primer.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 58


SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECK 05 31 00 - 1

DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Fabrication and erection of steel deck. The Work shall include, but not be limited to the following:

B. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding steel decking shall be considered a part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 4. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 5. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated

by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

7. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 8. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 9. SDI Roof Deck Design Manual. 10. SDI Diaphragm Design Manual.





3. Work performed on the premises of a fabricator approved by the building official need not be tested and inspected per the table below. The fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance

01/27/2020 59



that the work has been performed in accordance with the approved plans and specification to the building official and the Architect and Engineer of Record.






SDI - QA / QC STANDARD FOR STEEL DECK INSTALLATION O – Observe these items on an intermittent basis P – Perform these tasks prior to final acceptance for each item or element.

Inspection Tasks Prior to Deck Placement

Verify compliance of materials (deck and all deck accessories) with construction documents, including profiles, material properties, and base metal thickness

P

Document acceptance or rejection of deck and deck accessories P

Inspection Tasks After Deck Placement

Verify compliance of deck and all deck accessories installation with construction documents P Verify deck materials are represented by the mill certifications that comply with the construction documents

P

Document acceptance or rejection of installation of deck and deck accessories P

Inspection Tasks Prior to Welding

Welding procedure specifications (WPS) available O

Manufacturer certifications for welding consumables available O

Material identification (type / grade) O

Check welding equipment O

Inspection Tasks During Welding

Use of qualified welders O

Control of handling of welding consumables O

Environmental conditions (wind speed, moisture, temperature) O

WPS followed O

01/27/2020 60



SDI - QA / QC STANDARD FOR STEEL DECK INSTALLATION O – Observe these items on an intermittent basis P – Perform these tasks prior to final acceptance for each item or element.

Inspection Tasks After Welding

Verify size and location of welds, including support, sidelap, and perimeter welds P

Welds meet visual acceptance criteria P

Verify repair activities P

Document acceptance or rejection of welds P

Inspection Tasks Prior to Mechanical Fastening

Manufacturer installation instructions are available for mechanical fasteners O

Proper tools are available for fastener installation O

Proper storage for mechanical fasteners O

Inspection Tasks During Mechanical Fastening

Fasteners are positioned as required O

Fasteners are installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions O

Inspection Tasks After Mechanical Fastening

Check spacing, type, and installation of support fasteners P

Check spacing, type, and installation of sidelap fasteners P

Check spacing, type, and installation of perimeter fasteners P

Verify repair activities P

Document acceptance or rejection of mechanical fasteners P


A. Welding: Qualify Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.3. Provide certifications that welders to be employed in the construction have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the contractor’s responsibility.

B. Contractor to verify that the manufacturer’s steel deck type selected is listed on the UL fire rated roof assembly specified by the Architect for this project.

C. Furnish and install steel deck in accordance with the manufacturer’s current ICC Research Committee Report to obtain diaphragm values indicated.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare and submit shop drawings for Engineer’s approval. Shop drawings shall indicate deck layout, depth, uncoated metal thickness, framing and supports with unit dimensions and sections, shear stud layout and complete end jointing. Contractor to verify measurements, lines, elevations, and details of field conditions to conform with actual conditions.

B. Provide details of all accessories.

01/27/2020 61



C. Shop drawings shall also indicate typical welding or mechanical anchoring pattern for steel deck and accessories.

D. Prepare and submit allowable construction span tables and allowable total load tables for Engineer’s approval. Tables shall be accompanied with a letter of certification from the manufacturer stating the tabulated design values were determined in accordance with the Steel Deck Institute’s Design Manuals for Roof Deck, Floor Deck and Diaphragm Design.

1. The gauges and section moduli indicated on the drawings or specified herein are minimum and the gauge and section modulus of the deck furnished shall meet or exceed these minimum requirements. All gauges are United States standard, measured prior to coating.

E. WPS and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) shall be current and approved by the Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR).

F. Provide manufacturer’s latest recommendations and installation instructions.

G. Prepare and submit product data of proposed materials.

H. Drive pin fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s product data sheets, test data sheets and deck diaphragm design load tables to demonstrate their products capability to fasten the deck for the required structural loads.


A. All decking materials shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will prevent damage or deformation of sheets. Damaged material shall not be erected or repaired without Structural Engineer’s approval.

B. Deck panels shall be stored clear of the ground, elevated on one end, and protected from weather with waterproof covering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FASTENERS

A. Support Fasteners:

1. Welded: Refer to drawings for weld size and spacing requirements.

a. Weld washers required for material less than 0.028" thick. Welding washers shall a minimum thickness of 0.0598 inches and be applicable to AWS D1.3 type welding and of type as recommended by the deck manufacturer.

b. Weld metal shall penetrate all layers of deck material and shall have good fusion to the supporting steel. Fasten ribbed deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports.

1) All welding shall be in conformance with previously cited AWS recommendations in appearance and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work.

2. Screws: Zinc-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel screws. Refer to drawings for fastener spacing requirements.

01/27/2020 62



B. Side Lap Fasteners:

1. Mechanical: Zinc coated self-drilling, self-tapping type (minimum No. 10) steel screws. Refer to drawings for fastener spacing requirements.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Steel materials to conform to ASTM A108 meeting the requirements of ASTM A653, G60 coating.

B. Provide all closers, fillers, starters, sump pans, metal cant strips, ridge and valley plates, and similar accessories required for a complete installation. Provide cover plates at all locations where direction of deck span changes. Unless otherwise noted, accessories shall be of the same steel sheet material, finish, and thickness as the deck sections.

C. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

D. Recessed Sump Pans: Single piece steel sheet of same material, finish and thickness as the deck, with 3-inch-wide flanges and recessed pan of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. Cut drain holes in the field.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. Correct inaccuracies in alignment or level before deck units are finally placed.

B. Deck units and deck accessories herein specified shall be thoroughly and securely erected by experienced workmen fastening to supporting steel members as herein specified. All work shall be in conformance with manufacturer’s latest printed recommendations and approved shop drawings.

C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

D. The finished work shall be true, flat planes and to slopes indicated with end joints flush and without sharp protruding edges. Exposed underside of deck shall be true without defect.

E. Where large predetermined openings for elevators, stairs, ducts, and similar elements passing through the deck units occur, furnish prefabricated units to fit job conditions. Where other holes or openings are required in decking after erection, reinforce such holes as indicated on the drawings. Cantilever deck to the edge of slabs only as indicated on the drawings.

F. Burning of holes in decking will not be permitted.

G. Steel decking shall be installed to span supporting steel members at right angles. Panels shall be securely anchored to each structural support it rests on or passes.

H. Except where single spans are indicated, furnish decking in minimum lengths to span 3 spans with telescoping or nested 2-inch end laps and interlocking or nested side laps.

3.2 ROOF DECK

A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members using welds and mechanical fasteners as specified herein and on the drawings.

01/27/2020 63



B. Deck shall be fastened through the bottom of the deck rib to all structural supports for the specific deck sections.

C. End bearing of roof decking shall have a minimum of 1-1/2 inches of bearing occurring over structural supports

D. Place deck panels on structural supports and adjust to final position with ends aligned. Attach to supports immediately after placement.

E. Roof sump pans shall be installed over openings provided in roof deck with flanges welded to the top of the deck. Space welds at 12 inches apart with at least 1 weld in each corner.

F. Install all roof deck accessories in accordance with the roof deck manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.3 FIELD TOUCH UP

A. After erection, all weld burn marks and abraded spots shall be cleaned and field painted with a rust-inhibiting metal primer matching formulations and color of shop coat or a zinc-rich rust inhibiting paint for galvanized deck surfaces.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 64


SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING (CFSF) SYSTEM 05 40 00 - 1

DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING (CFSF) SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Non-load bearing structural steel studs framing system of 20 to 12 gauge (33 mil to 97 mil) members along with fasteners and related accessories. Furnish and install cold-form steel framing, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work shall include, but not be limited to the following items:

1. Non-load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall framing.

2. Provide tracks, blocking, lintels, clips angles, bridging, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners and accessories to construct a complete steel framing system.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Sections of Division 01. B. Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel. C. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joists. D. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Deck.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Where any provisions of other pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern.

1. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. AISI S200 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions. 3. AISI S202 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing. 4. AISI S211 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Wall Stud Design. 5. AISI S212 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design. 6. AISI S213 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Lateral Design. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

9. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing Members. 10. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)

Steel Studs and Related Accessories. 11. AWCI - Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries. 12. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 13. SSMA - Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.

01/27/2020 65













Cold-Formed Structural Steel Con

tinuo

us

Perio

dic

Referenced Standard

IBC Reference

Exterior wall covering and wall connections to roof and floor diaphragms and framing

X 1705.11.3


A. Workmen Qualifications:

1. For the actual erection of cold-formed steel framing system, use only skilled journeymen steel framing erectors who are thoroughly experienced with the materials and methods specified.

2. Use qualified welders and comply with AWS standards.

B. Design Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience at manufacturing cold-formed steel and framing systems and related accessories. Manufacturer shall be a current and “full” member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) or Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA).

01/27/2020 66



C. All cold-formed steel furnished under this section shall be supplier by a manufacturer who is a current member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) or Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA).

D. Steel studs, joists, headers, and other elements used for this project are sized based on SSMA. Elements of equal or greater capacity may be exchanged.

1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance:

1. Provide CFSF capable of withstanding design loads indicated on the plans.

2. Design CFSF to withstand design loads meeting the following deflection limits:

a. Exterior walls backing up brick or stone veneer: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of wall height.

b. Exterior walls clad with metal siding, exterior insulated finish systems or other flexible non-brittle finishes: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of wall height.

3. Design CFSF to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120°F.

4. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members (1-inch maximum), and clearances of intended openings.

5. CFSF shall be designed in accordance with all AISI Standards.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Prepare and submit complete erection and detailed shop drawings for Engineer’s approval, including framing plans indicating size, gauge, weight and location of all framing members. Shop drawings shall indicate the following:

a. Component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, bracing, bridging, strapping, connections, and accessories or items required of other related work. Provide stud layout.

b. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted/welded framing connections.

c. Detail size and location of all bridging, strapping, bracing, splices, and accessories required for installation.

B. Product Data:

1. Provide product data on standard framing members. Describe materials and finish, product criteria and limitations. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

01/27/2020 67




A. Steel members shall be transported, stored and erected in a manner that will avoid any damage or deformation. Bent or deformed members will be rejected and shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of the responsible party. Store clear of ground and in such a manner so as to eliminate excessive handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Framing Materials:

1. Studs shall conform to the ASTM designations listed in the General Notes of the drawings, unless noted otherwise, and be formed to channel shape, punched web, with nominal size as indicated on drawings.

2. Track shall be minimum 20 gauge (33 mil) thick sheet steel, channel shaped, solid web, same width as above studs. Track shall provide a tight fit for studs.

B. Accessories:

1. Bracing, furring and bridging shall consist of formed sheet steel with thickness determined for conditions encountered. Provide manufacturer's standard shapes, complete with finish same as framing members.

2. Plates, gussets and clips shall consist of formed sheet steel with thickness determined for conditions encountered. Provide manufacturer's standard shapes, complete with finish same as framing members.

C. Fasteners:

1. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws, bolts nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A90, complete with hot-dip galvanized minimum size: 1/4-14.

2. Expansion anchors shall be "Kwik" bolts, as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.

3. All other fasteners shall be as indicated on drawings or as recommended by the above cold-form manufacturer.

4. Welding connections are to be performed in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3 “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.” Consult AWS D19.0 latest edition “Welding Zinc Coated Sheet” and ANSI Standard Z49.1 for information regarding welding procedures.

D. Finishes:

1. Furnish all studs system components with a factory galvanized (G60), galvanized (G90), or prime coat finish.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections, of sizes and profiles required with framing members fitted, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.

B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Worksite, ready for installation.

01/27/2020 68



C. Bearing studs must be fabricated with full stud end seated against track web. Do not use studs that have been cut at punchouts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces and building framing components are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions and substrate.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Cold-formed steel framing system shall consist of structural steel studs with locations as shown on drawings. All work shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's latest printed specifications. Framing members shall be securely attached by fusion welding with fillet, plug, butt or seam type welds mechanical fasteners as indicated on drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

a. All field welding shall be in accordance with AWS previously cited. b. Wire tying of stud or components in system will not be allowed. c. Complete framing system ready to receive subsequent facing material.

2. Provision shall be made in studs for rigid fastening of all blocking and special braces or framing and for attachment and support of electrical outlets or other equipment indicated to be supported by stud construction.

a. All anchorage, bracing and blocking shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Surfaces abraded by handling, weld locations and other miscellaneous defects shall be touched-up with zinc-rich galvanizing compound (ZRC) coating.

B. Erection of Studding:

1. Top and bottom runner members shall be the same size and gauge as the stud and be continuous for the total length of framing system or as long as practical and shall be securely attached a maximum of 24 inches on centers with approved fastening devices. Studs shall extend in one piece full height vertically between runners, spaced no greater than 24 inches on centers, with all web cut-outs in perfect alignment. Studs shall provide solid backing at corners and jambs. Install studs with all components property aligned and braced with all work plumb and true ready and acceptable to receive surface materials.

a. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. b. Field cutting of studs shall be done by sawing. c. Splices in axial load studs will not be permitted. d. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design

requirements. e. Extend stud framing through ceiling to underside of floor or roof structure above. f. Install intermediate studs above and below openings with studs equally spaced to

correspond to adjacent stud spacing.

01/27/2020 69



g. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing for non-load bearing framing.

h. Framing fabricator shall ensure punchout alignment when assembling framing and field cutting to length.

i. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members. j. In the event a track butt joint occurs within a panel, abutting pieces of track shall be

butt welded or spliced together. No such splices shall occur at any head or sill condition.

2. Steel studs shall be located not more than 2 inches from all door, abutting partitions, partition corners and other construction. Unless detailed otherwise, runner track or stud member shall be used as a runner over door frames. Structural studs and joists shall be securely and rigidly anchored in place to give a total and complete support to subsequent materials attached thereto. All studs shall be securely attached to jamb and head anchor clips of each door frame by manufacturer's recommended method.

a. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Jamb studs at doors, windows, and other wall openings shall be designed to resist the tributary load of the opening and meet specified performance requirements.

b. Cold-rolled steel channel stiffeners or bridging shall be provided and installed horizontally every 60 inches in all framing systems through stud web cut-outs with welding clips welded in place at each stud.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 70

SPECIFICATIONS: WILTON COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT

HIGH SCHOOL LOBBY ADDITION

WILTON, IOWA

ARCHITECT PROJECT #I1819.01

SECTION 211119 - FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 211119 - 1

SECTION 211119 - FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Exposed-type fire-department connections.

2. Flush-type fire-department connections.

3. Yard-type fire-department connections.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

A. Standard: UL 405.

B. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.

C. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

D. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.

E. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and

threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or

clappers.

F. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.

G. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.

H. Outlet: With pipe threads.

I. Body Style: [Horizontal] [Square] [Vertical].

J. Number of Inlets: Two.

K. Outlet Location: Back.

L. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."

M. Finish: [Polished chrome plated] [Rough brass or bronze] [Rough chrome plated].

N. Outlet Size: NPS 4.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fire-department connections.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression standpipe system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-department connection installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

01/27/2020 71



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 211119 - FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 211119 - 2

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type fire-department connections.

B. Install yard-type fire-department connections in concrete slab support. Comply with requirements

for concrete in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 72



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-protection valves.

3. Sprinklers.

4. Alarm devices.

5. Pressure gages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that

is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers

when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.

Hose connections are included if indicated.

B. New fire protection service entrance.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through

water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

b. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

d. Laundries: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

e. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

f. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

g. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

1) Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

2) Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

3) Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

h. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

1) Office Spaces: 120 sq. ft..

2) Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft..

3) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft..

4) Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft..

5) Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise

indicated.

01/27/2020 73



WILTON, IOWA



i. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless

otherwise indicated:

1) Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes.

2) Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have

been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

E. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test

Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and

providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall

comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including

Four Stories in Height."

3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to

provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,

including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

01/27/2020 74



WILTON, IOWA



1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space

for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required

by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for

each type of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting

materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be

factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and

smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

C. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless

steel pipe with threaded ends.

D. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

E. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Corcoran Piping System Co.

c. National Fittings, Inc.

d. Shurjoint Piping Products.

e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

f. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel

pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless

otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-

rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

K. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing,

rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.


following:

a. Victaulic Company.

01/27/2020 75



WILTON, IOWA



2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,

nonmetallic and asbestos free.

1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for

wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES

A. General Requirements:

1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig.

B. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:


b. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.

3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.

4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with

grooved ends.

5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.

C. Iron Butterfly Valves:



following:


b. Fivalco Inc.

c. Global Safety Products, Inc.

d. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Pratt, Henry Company.

h. Shurjoint Piping Products.

i. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

j. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL 1091.

3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

5. End Connections: Grooved.

D. Check Valves:


following:

a. AFAC Inc.

b. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.

c. Anvil International, Inc.

d. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

01/27/2020 76



WILTON, IOWA



g. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

h. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

i. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

j. Fivalco Inc.

k. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

l. Groeniger & Company.

m. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

n. Matco-Norca.

o. Metraflex, Inc.

p. Milwaukee Valve Company.

q. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.

r. NIBCO INC.

s. Potter Roemer.

t. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

u. Shurjoint Piping Products.

v. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

w. United Brass Works, Inc.

x. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.

y. Victaulic Company.

z. Viking Corporation.

aa. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.



4. Type: Swing check.

5. Body Material: Cast iron.

6. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

E. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:


following:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary.

b. American Valve, Inc.

c. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

g. Hammond Valve.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.

j. NIBCO INC.

k. Shurjoint Piping Products.

l. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

m. United Brass Works, Inc.

n. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.





2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES


1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by

FM Global, listing.

01/27/2020 77



WILTON, IOWA




B. Angle Valves:


following:

a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

C. Ball Valves:


following:

a. Affiliated Distributors.

b. Anvil International, Inc.

c. Barnett.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

e. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

f. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

g. Flowserve.

h. FNW.

i. Jomar International, Ltd.

j. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

k. Kitz Corporation.

l. Legend Valve.

m. Metso Automation USA Inc.

n. Milwaukee Valve Company.

o. NIBCO INC.

p. Potter Roemer.

q. Red-White Valve Corporation.

r. Southern Manufacturing Group.

s. Stewart, M. A. and Sons Ltd.

t. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

u. Victaulic Company.

v. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

D. Globe Valves:


following:

a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

E. Plug Valves:


following:

a. Southern Manufacturing Group.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES



FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating:

a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.


4. Size: Same as connected piping.


B. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:

01/27/2020 78



WILTON, IOWA




following:

a. AFAC Inc.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.



4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.

5. Size: NPS 3/4.

6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.7 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:


following:


b. National Fittings, Inc.

c. Shurjoint Piping Products.

d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

e. Victaulic Company.



4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


following:

a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.


d. Victaulic Company.


FM Global, listing.


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve.


6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

C. Branch Line Testers:


following:

a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.

b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

c. Potter Roemer.



4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

01/27/2020 79



WILTON, IOWA



7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


following:

a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.

b. Triple R Specialty.


d. Victaulic Company.

e. Viking Corporation.


FM Global, listing.


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.


6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

2.8 SPRINKLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. AFAC Inc.

2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

3. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

5. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.

6. Victaulic Company.

7. Viking Corporation.

B. General Requirements:


FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.

2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by

application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated.

2. Bronze.

3. Painted.

E. Special Coatings:

1. Wax.

2. Lead.

3. Corrosion-resistant paint.

F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

G. Sprinkler Guards:

01/27/2020 80



WILTON, IOWA




following:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

c. Victaulic Company.

d. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.9 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Flow Indicators:


following:

a. ADT Security Services, Inc.

b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company.

d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

e. Viking Corporation.

f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.


3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary

contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable

retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.


7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

C. Pressure Switches:


following:

a. AFAC Inc.

b. Barksdale, Inc.

c. Detroit Switch, Inc.

d. Potter Electric Signal Company.

e. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

g. United Electric Controls Co.

h. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

D. Valve Supervisory Switches:


following:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.

b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company.

d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.


3. Type: Electrically supervised.

01/27/2020 81



WILTON, IOWA



4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

2.10 PRESSURE GAGES


following:

1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.

2. Ashcroft, Inc.

3. Brecco Corporation.

4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. If required to finalize hydraulic calculations, perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13

and NFPA 291.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities

having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved

working plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and

sized and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when

sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to

drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and

spill over floor drain or to outside building.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with

requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal

01/27/2020 82



WILTON, IOWA



seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit

removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.

M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. ."

O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that

have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground

applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads

full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join

pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs

one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

I. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with

tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

J. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized-steel pipe.

K. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA

C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-

end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

L. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA

C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-

end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

M. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with

tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

N. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and

specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

01/27/2020 83



WILTON, IOWA



B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating

portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Specialty Valves:

1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply

to system.

2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.

3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall,

wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.

4. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

5. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight

steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved

joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; uncoated, plain-end-pipe fittings; and

twist-locked joints.

3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end

fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

4. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

01/27/2020 84



WILTON, IOWA



D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded

fittings; and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end


3. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.

4. Schedule 10, or hybrid black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end


5. Schedule 10, or hybrid black-steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded joints

3.10 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.

3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright, pendent, dry sprinklers; and sidewall, dry sprinklers as

indicated.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

4. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view;

rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to

acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 85



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Grout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel

collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. Metraflex Company (The).

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type

and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required

to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

01/27/2020 86



WILTON, IOWA



D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other

wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants

specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for

firestopping specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble

sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



01/27/2020 87



WILTON, IOWA



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 88



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and

with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-

steel type

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons using new material

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 89



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

2. Thermowells.

3. Dial-type pressure gages.

4. Gage attachments.

5. Test plugs.

6. Test-plug kits.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


following:

a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

e. Trerice, H. O. Co.

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

g. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.

7. Window: Glass or plastic.

8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5

percent of scale range.

B. Plastic-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


following:

a. Ernst Flow Industries.

b. Marsh Bellofram.

01/27/2020 90



WILTON, IOWA



c. Miljoco Corporation.

d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

e. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

g. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

h. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.


3. Case: Plastic; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Window: Glass or plastic.

7. Stem: Aluminum, brass, or stainless steel and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

8. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5

percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer

connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 TEST PLUGS



1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. Miljoco Corporation.

3. National Meter, Inc.

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Trerice, H. O. Co.

7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include

extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

01/27/2020 91



WILTON, IOWA



2.4 TEST-PLUG KITS



1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. Miljoco Corporation.

3. National Meter, Inc.

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Trerice, H. O. Co.

7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and

carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of

diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and

tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

D. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and probe.

Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

G. Install test plugs in piping tees.

H. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and

maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

01/27/2020 92



WILTON, IOWA



3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 93



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Bronze lift check valves.

4. Bronze swing check valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

2. Section 22 11 13 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.

3. Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

01/27/2020 94



WILTON, IOWA



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:



following:

a. Apollo Valves.

b. Hammond Valve.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Forged brass.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Stainless steel.

i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:



following:

01/27/2020 95



WILTON, IOWA



a. Apollo Valves.

b. Hammond Valve.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Stainless steel.

i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:



following:

a. Apollo Valves.

b. Hammond Valve.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

01/27/2020 96



WILTON, IOWA



1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball.

2. Throttling Service: Ball.

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and

weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option

is indicated in valve schedules below.

6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

7. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two or Three piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.

3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged

ends.

2. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 175 CWP.

3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.

4. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 97



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.


1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined

weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support

bearing surface of piping.

3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

C. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

01/27/2020 98



WILTON, IOWA



EQUIPMENT

220529 - 2

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS



1. Allied Tube & Conduit.

2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

3. Flex-Strut Inc.

4. GS Metals Corp.

5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

6. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

7. Wesanco, Inc.

8. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel

pipes.

9. Standard: MFMA-4.

10. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

11. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


13. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc.

14. Paint Coating: Vinyl.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:



following:

a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

g. PHS Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,

accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


7. Coating: Zinc.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS



1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

2. Clement Support Services.

3. ERICO International Corporation.

4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

5. PHS Industries, Inc.

01/27/2020 99



WILTON, IOWA



EQUIPMENT

220529 - 3

6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C

591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor

barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C

591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,

clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install

intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support

together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than

4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators

that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to

powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

01/27/2020 100



WILTON, IOWA



EQUIPMENT

220529 - 4

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems,

to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion

joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert

with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.

Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall

span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

01/27/2020 101



WILTON, IOWA



EQUIPMENT

220529 - 5

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of

welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile

environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping

and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS

24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS

3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if

little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center

closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated,


01/27/2020 102



WILTON, IOWA



EQUIPMENT

220529 - 6

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS

1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe

base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe

base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to

retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-

1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and

cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from

single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal

movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not

necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if

vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion

and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS

24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building

attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe

hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

01/27/2020 103



WILTON, IOWA



EQUIPMENT

220529 - 7

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams

for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams

for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural

steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by

using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal

movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that

matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to

prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 104



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Pipe labels.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-

1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of

principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.

3. Background Color: White.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


1/2 by 3/4 inch.






8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification

Section number and title where equipment is specified.

01/27/2020 105



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: White or green.

b. Letter Color: Black or white.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: White.

b. Letter Color: Black.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 106



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.

2. Domestic hot-water piping.

3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.

4. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of

50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index

of 150 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 22

05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before

preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of

insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin

on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

01/27/2020 107



WILTON, IOWA



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground

Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according

to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements

are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket

requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.



a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.



01/27/2020 108



WILTON, IOWA



a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;

CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;

85-60/85-70.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding

insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




CP-82.



85-20.


D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.

d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-

PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.



a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;

30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film

thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.




CP-30.



30-35.


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.


5. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

01/27/2020 109



WILTON, IOWA






CP-10.



46-50.


e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying

with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying

with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.




Chil-Glas Number 10.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..



a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

01/27/2020 110



WILTON, IOWA



B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C;

thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is

indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.



a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. Color as selected by Architect.

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and

supply covers for lavatories.

2.10 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.

c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;

suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.

b. Compac Corporation; 130.

c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches.

3. Thickness: 6 mils.




2.11 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:



following:

a. Engineered Brass Company.

b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.

c. McGuire Manufacturing.

01/27/2020 111



WILTON, IOWA



d. Plumberex.

e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.

f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water

supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures,:



following:

a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.

b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a

corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300

deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating

materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free

of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for

each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive

recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

01/27/2020 112



WILTON, IOWA



J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation

inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced

4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal

seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with

outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due

to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches

similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install

insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint

sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof

flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

01/27/2020 113



WILTON, IOWA



B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with

sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and

seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install

insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint

sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2

inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install

insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and

fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84

13 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific

requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same

material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against

adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces

with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with

adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation

by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is

thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts,

and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation

by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is

thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so

strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the

insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient

services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap

adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one

pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

01/27/2020 114



WILTON, IOWA



7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing

using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size

and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with

vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1

inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of

pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials

with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.

Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

01/27/2020 115



WILTON, IOWA



1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

C. Install PVC jackets in:

1. Any Exposed piping in areas where piping insulation is likely to be damaged shall have PVC

jacketing.

2. All exposed piping in mechanical rooms or storage closets below 9’ shall be covered with

PVC jacketing.

3. All exposed piping below 9’ in occupied spaces. (not covered above).

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint

system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91

23 "Interior Painting."

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection

of the completed Work.

3.9 REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR INSULATION SCHEDULE.

3.10 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-

applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC, Color- white: 20 mils thick.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 116



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside

buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping

components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

D. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

B. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS


1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

01/27/2020 117



WILTON, IOWA



B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


following:

a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.

b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

d. JCM Industries.

e. Romac Industries, Inc.

f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company.

g. Viking Johnson.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Jomar International.

e. Matco-Norca.

f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 150 PSIG.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:



following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.


c. Matco-Norca.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.


3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: 150 PSIG.

5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:



following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

01/27/2020 118



WILTON, IOWA



2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.


4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:



following:

a. Elster Perfection Corporation.

b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.

c. Matco-Norca.

d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated

unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside

the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure

gages in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain

valves and strainers in Section 22 11 19 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than

the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

01/27/2020 119



WILTON, IOWA



N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.

O. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for

thermometers in Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for

sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements

for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

C. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join

copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

D. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 22 05 29

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support

pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

01/27/2020 120



WILTON, IOWA



5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

D. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

that required by plumbing code.

2. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges

instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with

requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or

inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate

report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and

01/27/2020 121



WILTON, IOWA



allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that

must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until

satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to

provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired

before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA

C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of

chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of

chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample

approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in

applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

01/27/2020 122



WILTON, IOWA



1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered

joints.

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered

joints.

3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate

valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball

valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 123



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Balancing valves.

4. Temperature Actuated Water Mixing Valves.

5. Strainers.

6. Wall Drain Boxes.

7. Nonfreeze Wall and Roof Hydrants.

8. Drain valves.

9. Water-hammer arresters.

10. Flexible connectors.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. NOT NECESSARY FOR : Water hammer

arrestors, flexible connections, outlet boxes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:



following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Rain Bird Corporation.

01/27/2020 124



WILTON, IOWA



f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.

g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.


3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

6. Finish: Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


following:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products.

b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Legend Valve.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Prier Products, Inc.


h. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.


3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

d. Flomatic Corporation.

e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:


following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Flo Fab Inc.

c. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div.

d. NIBCO Inc.

e. TAC.

f. TACO Incorporated.


2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator.

3. Body: Brass or bronze.

4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.

5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

01/27/2020 125



WILTON, IOWA



B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves.:


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. Honeywell International Inc.

d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

e. Leonard Valve Company.

f. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.


h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

i. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

8. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 deg F.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.

6. Drain: Pipe plug.

2.8 WALL DRAIN BOXES

A. Condensate Drain Boxes:


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work


2. Mounting: Recessed.

3. Material and Finish: as indicated on the drawings.

2.9 NONFREEZE WALL AND ROOF HYDRANTS:

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Josam Company.

2. MIFAB, Inc.

3. Prier Products, Inc.

4. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

5. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

6. Watts Drainage Products.

7. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

01/27/2020 126



WILTON, IOWA



8. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

9. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products

2.10 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and

cap with brass chain.

B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.

5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.

2.11 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

h. Watts Drainage Products.

i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Copper tube with piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.

3. Flex Pression, Ltd.

4. Flex-Weld Incorporated.

5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

6. Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc.

7. Metraflex, Inc.

8. Proco Products, Inc.

9. TOZEN Corporation.

10. Unaflex.Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company.

01/27/2020 127



WILTON, IOWA



B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel

wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each pump.

D. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

E. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.

2. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies.

3. Calibrated balancing valves.



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check, backflow-

prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference

standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 128



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and

"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by

Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to

provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect Construction Manager Owner no fewer than two days in advance of

proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator

drainage fittings.

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


following:

a. ANACO-Husky.

01/27/2020 129



WILTON, IOWA



b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

c. Fernco Inc.

d. Matco-Norca, Inc.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

g. Stant.

h. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

D. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


following:

a. MG Piping Products Company.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277.

3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts;

and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint

fittings.

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M, water tube, drawn temper.

D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper.

E. Copper Pressure Fittings:

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-

joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch

maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.

B. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.

C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.

1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

01/27/2020 130



WILTON, IOWA



B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to

fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of

different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be

joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

2) Fernco Inc.

3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.

c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring

and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

e. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

f. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

g. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer

shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each

end.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be

joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:


the following:

1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.

01/27/2020 131



WILTON, IOWA



2) Central Plastics Company.

3) Hart Industries International, Inc.

4) Jomar International Ltd.

5) Matco-Norca, Inc.

6) McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

7) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

8) Wilkins; a Zurn company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:


the following:

1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.



4) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

5) Wilkins; a Zurn company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


the following:

1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2) Calpico, Inc.


4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig .

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:


the following:

1) Elster Perfection.

2) Grinnell Mechanical Products.


4) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

5) Victaulic Company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66

2) Electroplated steel nipple.

3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

01/27/2020 132



WILTON, IOWA



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 31 20 00

"Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double

Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with

common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of

flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades

and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.

Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,

cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as

completed.

L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;

2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

N. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

O. Install stainless-steel piping according to ASME A112.3.1 and applicable plumbing code.

P. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Q. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

R. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

01/27/2020 133



WILTON, IOWA



1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written

installation instructions.

3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

S. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure

plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for

cleanouts specified in Section 22 13 19 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains

specified in Section 22 13 19 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

T. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for

sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements

for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813,

water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

E. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.

Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in

cross pattern.

F. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and

fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.

3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.

4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples unions.

01/27/2020 134



WILTON, IOWA



3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges flange kits nipples.

4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support

pipe rolls on trapeze.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:


2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.

4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60

inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters:



3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:




K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:




4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

L. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

01/27/2020 135



WILTON, IOWA



M. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required

by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush

with floor.

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and

union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to

each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be

made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make

required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,

extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each

test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and

vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or

concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders

on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of

01/27/2020 136



WILTON, IOWA



overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with

water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack

openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping

system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water

closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing

additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas

and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and

to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based

latex paint.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.


3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper

pressure fittings; and soldered joints.


D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.


3. Stainless-steel pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints.

4. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.


END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 137



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


B. Section Includes:

1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.

3. Roof flashing assemblies.

4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.

5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

6. Flashing materials.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for storm drainage piping inside the

building, drainage piping specialties, and drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.



characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Floor drains

2. Clean outs


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary

piping specialty components.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

01/27/2020 138



WILTON, IOWA



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS



1. Josam Company.

2. MIFAB, Inc.

3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

4. Tyler Pipe, Wade division.


6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS



1. Commercial Enameling Co.

2. Josam Company; Josam Div.

3. MIFAB, Inc.

4. Prier Products, Inc.

5. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

6. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.


8. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron,

soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser

fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

C. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

D. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of

fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in

bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

E. Stack Flashing Fittings:

01/27/2020 139



WILTON, IOWA



1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof

membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

PART 3 INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALL CLEANOUTS IN ABOVE GROUND PIPING AND BUILDING DRAIN PIPING ACCORDING TO THE

FOLLOWING, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED:

A. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger

cleanout is indicated.

B. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

C. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.

D. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

3.2 FOR FLOOR CLEANOUTS FOR PIPING BELOW FLOORS, INSTALL CLEANOUT DECK PLATES WITH TOPS

FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR.

3.3 FOR CLEANOUTS LOCATED IN CONCEALED PIPING, INSTALL CLEANOUT WALL ACCESS COVERS OF

TYPES INDICATED WITH FRAME AND COVER FLUSH WITH FINISHED WALL.

3.4 INSTALL FLOOR DRAINS AT LOW POINTS OF SURFACE AREAS TO BE DRAINED. SET GRATES OF

DRAINS FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.

A. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

C. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining

flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

D. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise

indicated.

3.5 INSTALL DEEP-SEAL TRAPS ON FLOOR DRAINS AND OTHER WASTE OUTLETS, IF INDICATED.

3.6 INSTALL AIR-GAP FITTINGS ON DRAINING-TYPE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS AND ON INDIRECT WASTE

PIPING DISCHARGE INTO SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM.

3.7 INSTALL SLEEVE FLASHING DEVICE WITH EACH RISER AND STACK PASSING THROUGH ROOF WITH

WATERPROOF MEMBRANE.

3.8 INSTALL TRAPS ON PLUMBING SPECIALTY DRAIN OUTLETS. OMIT TRAPS ON INDIRECT WASTES UNLESS

TRAP IS INDICATED.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

01/27/2020 140



WILTON, IOWA




A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.


equipment.

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 141



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Divisions 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes electric storage water heaters for potable water.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. UL 1453 “Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters”

B. ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel code, Section IV, Part HLW

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1-2010

D. ISO 9001 “Quality Management System”

E. NFPA 70- National Electric Code NSF/ANSI Standard 61- Drinking Water System Components

F. ASTM G123 - 00(2005) “Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of Stainless

Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.”

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished

specialties and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,

components, and size of each field connection

C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail for wiring power signal, differentiate between manufacture- installed and

field-installed wiring

D. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include

maintenance guide and wiring diagrams

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment

B. Units: ETL, UL or CSA Listed as a Complete Electric Water Heater Assembly.

C. Conform to ASME Section IV. Part HLW for Water Heater construction.


A. Listing: The water heater will be listed ETL listed to UL 1453 “Electric Booster and Commercial

Storage Tank Water Heaters”

B. ASME Compliance: Water heater shall bear the ASME HLW stamp and be National Board listed

C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with

minimum twenty years’ experience.

D. Water heater manufacturer certified to ISO 9001 Quality Management System.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases

01/27/2020 142



WILTON, IOWA



1.8 WARRANTY

A. The heater shall have a first year service policy, which shall cover labor and freight costs under

certain conditions for warranty covered services.

B. Storage Tank: Three years

C. Controls and Other Components: Three years

D. Compression Tanks: Five years

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum twenty years’ experience. Provide one by the

following:

1. AO Smith

2. Rheem

3. PVI

4. Bradford White

5. State

6. American Water Heaters

2.2 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. STANDARD: UL 174.

2. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. PRESSURE RATING: 150 PSIG

c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. DIP TUBE: REQUIRED UNLESS COLD-WATER INLET IS NEAR BOTTOM OF TANK.

c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.

d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1

e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet.

g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for simultaneous

operation unless otherwise indicated. Limited to 12 kW total.

h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.

j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure

relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include

pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief

valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

k. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.

l. Capacity and Characteristics: As Scheduled on the drawings

2.3 WATER HEATER TRIM / ACCESSORIES

A. As a minimum, the heater will be equipped with the following:

1. electronic low water cutoff

2. an immersion operating thermostat

3. immersion temperature limiting device

01/27/2020 143



WILTON, IOWA



4. an ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve

5. and options as selected on form PV 8130

B. Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of UL

C. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed

butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at

tank.

2. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters level and plumb in accordance with manufacturers’ written instructions and

referenced standards.

B. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters on concrete base

C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-

valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch,

and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, domestic-

water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves

specified in Section 22 1119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in Section 22 0519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing

Piping."

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 FINISHING

A. The heater will be completely packaged, requiring only hookup for electrical and plumbing. The

heater will be insulated with multiple layers of heavy-density fiberglass, jacketed with powder-

coated steel panels, and mounted on heavy-duty channel skills. The heater will fit properly in

the space provided and installation will conform to all local, state, and national codes.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 22 0553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



01/27/2020 144



WILTON, IOWA



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in

testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

operation.


equipment.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 22 1116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and

maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.6 START-UP

A. Start up on the unit will be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of the

startup report will be provided to the owner.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 145



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224213 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224213 - 1

SECTION 224213 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Toilet seats.

4. Supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.




profiles, and finishes for water closets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

3. Product Data: For water consumption


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets



a. Kohler

b. American Standard

c. Briggs Plumbing Products

d. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc

e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures

f. Mansfield Plumbing Products

g. Peerless Pottery Sales

h. Zurn

B. Water Closets: Wall mounted, top spud.

1. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

2. Material: Vitreous china.

3. Type: Siphon jet.

4. Style: Flushometer valve.

5. Height: Standard.

6. Rim Contour: Elongated.

01/27/2020 146



WILTON, IOWA



7. Water Consumption: 1.6 gal. per flush.

8. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

9. Flushometer Valve: .

10. Toilet Seat: .

11. Support: .

12. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Refer to drawings for mounting heights.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Flush Valves



a. Sloan

b. Zurn

c. Moen

d. Hydrotek

B. Lever-Handle, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:


2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

3. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

4. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

5. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

6. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

7. Style: Exposed.

8. Consumption: 1.6 gal. per flush.

9. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.

10. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.


2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats <Insert drawing designation>:

1. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

2. Material: Plastic.

3. Type: Commercial (Standard).

4. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

5. Hinge: Check.

6. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

7. Seat Cover: Not required.

8. Color: White.

2.4 SUPPORTS

A. Water Closet Carrier:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

2. Description: Waste-fitting assembly, as required to match drainage piping material and

arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware matching

fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide

pipe space.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

01/27/2020 147



WILTON, IOWA



B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to piping

or building substrate.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and

waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted on

open side of water closet.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations

and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and

Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water

closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

01/27/2020 148



WILTON, IOWA




A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 149



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224214 - COMMERCIAL URINALS 224214 - 1

SECTION 224214 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.

2. Flushometer valves.




profiles, and finishes for urinals.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 URINALS

A. Urinals



a. American Standard America.

b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand.

d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.

e. Kohler Co.

f. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.

g. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc.

h. Zurn

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Flushometer Valves:



a. Sloan Valve Company.

b. Moen Commercial Incorporated.

c. Zurn.

d. Hydrotek


3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

01/27/2020 150



WILTON, IOWA



6. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

7. Consumption: 1.0 gal. per flush.

8. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to

match urinals.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and

Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

01/27/2020 151



WILTON, IOWA





A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 152



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224216 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224216 - 1

SECTION 224216 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories.

2. Faucets.




profiles, and finishes for lavatories.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory


indicated on Drawings.

a. Kohler Co.

b. American Standard

c. Crane Plumbing, LLC

d. Mansfield Plumbing Products, LLC

e. Zurn

2.2 FAUCETS



1. Kohler

2. American Standard

3. Chicago

4. Delta

5. Eljer

01/27/2020 153



WILTON, IOWA



6. Sloan

7. Hydrotek

8. Zurn

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects,"

for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8.

2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper-pipe and brass straight or offset tailpieces ASME A112.18.6,

braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick

brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people

with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use

deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon

requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified

in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 22 07 19 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

01/27/2020 154



WILTON, IOWA



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.

Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.



A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning

methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 155



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224217 - COMMERCIAL SINKS 224217 - 1

SECTION 224217 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sinks.

2. Sink faucets.

3. Mop Sinks.

4. Supply fittings.

5. Waste fittings.




profiles, and finishes for sinks.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINKS

A. Sinks:



a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Kohler

c. American Standard

d. Crane Plumbing, LLC

e. Mansfield Plumbing Products, LLC

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4.

b. Type: Ledge back.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS


for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, single-control mixing valve.

1. Faucets.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


1) American Standard America.

2) Chicago Faucets.

3) Delta Faucet Company.

4) Elkay Manufacturing Co.

5) Kohler Co.

01/27/2020 156



WILTON, IOWA



6) Moen Incorporated.

7) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

8) Hydrotek

9) Eljer

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and

fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

2.3 MOP SINK

A. Service Basins: Terrazzo, floor mounted.



a. Fiat

b. Acorn Engineering Company.

c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.

d. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

e. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS


for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8

2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe or ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel

flexible hose.

2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-thick

brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

2.6 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

01/27/2020 157



WILTON, IOWA



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply

with valve requirements specified in Section 22 05 23 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing

Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

E. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use

deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon

requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

F. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements

specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.




Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and

controls.



A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 158



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224223 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS 224223 - 1

SECTION 224223 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Shower faucets.




profiles, and finishes for shower valves.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For shower faucets to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOWER FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for

shower materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Shower Faucets:



a. American Standard America.

b. Bradley

c. Chicago Faucets.

d. Kohler Co.

e. Leonard Valve Company.

f. Moen Incorporated.

g. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before shower installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where showers will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.

01/27/2020 159



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224223 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS 224223 - 2

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with shower.

Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

C. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use

deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheons

requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified

in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS



B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers,

fittings, and controls.



A. After completing installation of shower valves, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 160



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 - 1

SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.


profiles, and finishes.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS



1. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

2. Halsey Taylor.

3. Haws Corporation.

B. Standards:

1. Comply with NSF 61.

2. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants," for water

coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for

children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

C. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure water

coolers to mounting frames.

01/27/2020 161



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS 224716 - 2

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations

where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 22 05 23

"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use

deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone

sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in

Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Install ball, gate, or globe shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve

requirements specified in Section 22 05 23 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and

Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 162



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT

230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected

loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating

sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

01/27/2020 163



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT

230513 - 2

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame

sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements

of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

2.6 P3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 164



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Black.

4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


1/2 by 3/4 inch.






B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification

Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond

paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number

and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

01/27/2020 165



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 166



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.

3. Control system verification.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.


A. Qualification Data: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that

the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in

"Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system

readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.

G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

01/27/2020 167



WILTON, IOWA



1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC, NEBB, or TABB as a

TAB technician.

B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE

111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

1.7 AGENCY APPROVAL

A. Testing and Balancing Agency shall be submitted for preliminary approval. Submittal shall include

name of firm, sample of data sheets, and a complete list of instruments to be used. Instrument list

shall give function, range, and manufacturer.

1. Omega

2. Systems Management Company, Des Moines, IA

3. Johnson Service of Des Moines, IA

4. Precision Test and Balance.

PART 3 EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are

accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for

environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions

about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and tunnels used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are

properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare

results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning,

and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight,

filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

01/27/2020 168



WILTON, IOWA



J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with

indicated perforations. (Startup screens are required to be hung adjacent to suction diffusers.)

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or

mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

2.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for

TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

h. Ceilings are installed.

i. Windows and doors are installed.

j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.

c. Water treatment is complete.

d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.

e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.

f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.

g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open.

h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.

i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers.

j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures

contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance," NEBB's "Procedural Standards

01/27/2020 169



WILTON, IOWA



for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," and/or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems

- Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings,

vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716

"HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable,

permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

2.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

2.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,

perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at

terminals and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

01/27/2020 170



WILTON, IOWA



3. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans,

belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design.

Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

2.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the

duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.

3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static

pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for

the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome

terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as

follows:

a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require

starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow.

Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal

units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow.

e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow.

Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation

from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and

cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.

01/27/2020 171



WILTON, IOWA



g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be

maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling

to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow.

Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates

minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals

for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection

and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary,

perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil

traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at

terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.

d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air

systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system

static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum

system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within

design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

d. Mark final settings.

e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data.

f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

2.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove

proper operation.

01/27/2020 172



WILTON, IOWA



2.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record fan and motor operating data.

2.9 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: open,

closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations

from indicated conditions.

2.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified

above.

2.11 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified

in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing

devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper

performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems

and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: After each phase is substantially completed, prepare progress reports to describe

completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of

deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate

report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

2.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

01/27/2020 173



WILTON, IOWA



3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

01/27/2020 174



WILTON, IOWA



j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

i. Return airflow in cfm.

j. Outdoor-air damper position.

k. Return-air damper position.

l. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft..

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

G. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment

reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

01/27/2020 175



WILTON, IOWA




b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.


f. Fuel type in input data.

g. Output capacity in Btu/h.

h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.

j. Motor horsepower and rpm.

k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.

l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.



b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

d. Air temperature differential in deg F.

e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.

f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.

g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.

i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.

j. Manifold pressure in psig.

k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.

l. Operating set point in Btu/h.

m. Motor voltage at each connection.

n. Motor amperage for each phase.

o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.


f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.



b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

01/27/2020 176



WILTON, IOWA



I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft..

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.

c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft..


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final airflow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

2.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are

being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 177



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, round concealed supply.

2. Indoor, round concealed return.

3. Indoor, concealed exhaust to a point 10’ from and penetration of building exterior.

4. Indoor, exposed exhaust to a point 10’ from penetration of building exterior.

5. Indoor, fresh air intake ducts from the air handling unit to and including the back of the

intake louver.


1. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."

2. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of

50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index

of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section

230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before

preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

01/27/2020 178



WILTON, IOWA



1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing

and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory

test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum

Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles

for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according

to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply

with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-

applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply

with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with

factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:


CP-127.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;

85-60/85-70.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding

insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



CP-82.



85-50.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-

PRF-19565C, Type II.

01/27/2020 179



WILTON, IOWA



1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.



30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film

thickness.



5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.



CP-10.



46-50.


e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



CP-76.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;

95-44.

c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: Aluminum.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying

with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5

strands/sq. in. for covering ducts.



Chil-Glas No. 5.

B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.



Mast-A-Fab.

01/27/2020 180



WILTON, IOWA



b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..


a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.

2.8 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;

complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.

c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.

d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.




7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4

inch wide with wing seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; CD.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to

projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in

position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following

requirements:


01/27/2020 181



WILTON, IOWA



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.

c. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, stainless-

steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not

less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to

ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free

of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each

item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

01/27/2020 182



WILTON, IOWA



F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive

recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation

inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced

4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive

self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due

to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches

similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install

insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves

to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration fire-stopping” and fire-resistive joint

sealers.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper

sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct

insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413

"Penetration Fire-stopping."

01/27/2020 183



WILTON, IOWA



3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches

o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install

vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,

and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover

insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation

thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At

end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for

each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered

gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-

inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches

o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

01/27/2020 184



WILTON, IOWA



c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install

vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,

and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover

insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation

thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for

each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside

radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-

inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

7. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

8. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.

9. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

10. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

11. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

12. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

13. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end

joints.

14. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with

vapor-barrier mastic.

3.6 REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR DUCT INSULATION AND LINER SCHEDULE.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 185



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230763 - FAN-COIL UNITS 230763 - 1

SECTION 230763 - FAN-COIL UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following:

1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

C. Units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

D. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

E. Store and handle components according to the manufacturer’s recommendation.

F. The mandatory contractor service and install training shall be performed by the manufacturer. If

an alternate manufacturer is approved, then the requirements for installation for that

manufacturer shall be followed by the installing contractor.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units, refrigerant piping and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light

fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

01/27/2020 186



WILTON, IOWA



1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Compressor failure.

b. Condenser coil leak.

2. Units shall be covered by an extended manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of five

(5) years from date of installation. Installing contractor is required to attend manufacturer

training (which may be at a remote location) as required to meet warranty requirements.

3. Compressors shall have a manufacturer’s limited warranty for a period of six (6) years from

date of installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Daikin.

2. LG.

3. Mitsubishi.

2.2 SYSTEM DESTRICPTION

A. The multi-zone heat pump system shall consist of outdoor unit(s), multiple indoor units, and

integral controls. System shall be capable of changing mode (cooling to heating, heating to

cooling) with no interruption to system operation. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall

be independently controlled. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall

range from 50% to 130% of outdoor rated capacity.

B. System shall utilize refrigerant to air heat exchanger for heat rejection. System shall be capable

of operating at temperatures of -4°F to 115°F ambient air temperatures.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNIT

A. General:

1. The outdoor units shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that interface to an integral

controls system that shall perform all functions necessary for operation. Each outdoor unit

module shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired and run tested at the factory.

a. All units requiring a factory supplied twinning kits shall be piped together in the field,

without the need for equalizing line(s). If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any

additional material, cost, and labor to install additional lines shall be incurred by the

contractor.

2. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor fan coil units shall be insulated.

3. Outdoor unit shall be able to connect to all specified indoor units.

4. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator with refrigerant level sensors and controls.

5. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, over-current protection, crankcase

heater and DC bus protection.

6. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 164

feet and have total refrigerant tubing length of up to 3,280 feet. The greatest length is not to

exceed 541 feet between outdoor unit and the indoor units without the need for line size

changes or traps.

7. The outdoor unit shall have rated performance of heating operation at -4°F ambient

temperatures and cooling mode down to 23°F ambient temperatures, without additional

low ambient controls. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost,

and labor to meet low ambient operating condition and performance shall be incurred by

the contractor.

8. The outdoor unit shall have a high efficiency oil separator plus additional logic controls to

ensure adequate oil volume in the compressor is maintained.

01/27/2020 187

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=3602



WILTON, IOWA



9. The outdoor unit shall be provided with a manufacturer supplied 20 gauge hot dipped

galvanized snow /hail guard. The snow/hail guard protects the outdoor coil surfaces from

hail damage and snow build-up in severe climates.

10. Unit shall include defrost controls.

B. Heat Interchanger circuit.

1. The outdoor unit shall contain a heat interchanger circuit for sub-cooling liquid prior to

entering the outdoor coil during the heating mode.

2. The interchanger shall be of a copper tube within a tube construction.

3. The interchanger circuit refrigerant flow shall be controlled by an electronic expansion

valve.

C. Unit Cabinet:

1. The casing(s) shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished.

2. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow.

D. Fan:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller

type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG external static pressure,

but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24 in. WG external static pressure

via dipswitch.

2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be

completely variable speed.

3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation.

4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

E. Refrigerant

1. R410A refrigerant shall be required.

2. Polyolester (POE) oil shall be required. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using alternate oil

types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison of hygroscopic

properties for alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking alternate oil for approval at

least 10 days prior to bidding.

F. Coil:

1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on

copper tubing.

2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue-fin finish.

3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.

4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven

compressor.

G. Basepan Heater:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with a basepan heater. Basepan heater shall

activate only when compressor is operating in heating mode at an outdoor ambient

temperature of 39F or below. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional

material, cost, and labor to meet basepan heater condition and performance shall be

incurred by the contractor.

H. Compressor:

1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic

compressor. Non inverter-driven compressors, which cause inrush current and require larger

wire sizing, shall not be allowed.

2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s).

3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity

shall be completely variable with a turndown of 15% of rated capacity.

4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload.

5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

01/27/2020 188



WILTON, IOWA



6. Field-installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding,

manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each

system and module placement for this project.

I. Controls:

1. The outdoor unit shall have the capability of up to 8 levels of demand control for each

refrigerant system

J. Electrical:

1. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors.

2. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed

using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING / LINE SETS

A. The mechanical contract shall install all refrigerant piping. All piping/line sets and insulation shall

be furnished by the Unit manufacturer. Furnish and install materials recommended by unit

manufacturer.

2.5 4-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE - INDOOR UNIT

A. General: Four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The

unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all

factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and

fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an

auto restart function, an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to

adjust airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged

with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory.

B. Unit Cabinet: The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling-recessed cassette. Four-way grille shall be

fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow. The grille vane angles shall be

individually adjustable from the wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for the

conditioned space.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion

valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

D. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise

drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan.

E. Both refrigerant lines to the units shall be insulated.

F. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. The fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a

single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with

permanently lubricated bearings. The fan shall consist of five (5) speed settings, Low, Mid1, Mid2,

High and Auto. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed

based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. The unit shall

have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. The

unit shall have switches that can be set to provide optimum airflow based on ceiling height and

number of outlets used. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that

shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution.

The vanes shall have an Auto-Wave selectable option in the heating mode that shall randomly

cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat the space.

G. Fan Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

2. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

H. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

01/27/2020 189



WILTON, IOWA



I. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated drain pan per ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate

with threaded nipple on pan.

J. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter.

K. Controls:

1. Unit shall be capable of sending a low-voltage signal to a backup heater. Furnish relay for

installation by contractor.

2. Multiple units shall be wired to one central controller. Refer to Drawings.

3. Each unit shall control to a return air setpoint at the return air inlet.

4. One unit shall be selected as the master, which will determine whether the outdoor unit is in

heating or cooling.

2.6 WALL-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS:

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect,

and discharge drain pans with drain connection.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion

valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

C. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise

drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan.

D. Both refrigerant lines to the units shall be insulated.

E. Retain "Electric Coil" Subparagraph below for heat-pump units and supplemental electric heat.

F. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.

G. Fan Motors:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

2. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

H. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

I. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated drain pan per ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate

with threaded nipple on pan.

J. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of a long-life washable filter.

K. Controls: Unit shall be capable of sending a low-voltage signal to a backup heater. Furnish relay

for installation by contractor.

2.7 SYSTEM CONTROLS

A. General: The controls network shall be capable of supporting remote controllers, schedule

timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers.

B. Electrical:

1. General:

a. The controls network shall operate at 24VDC. Controller power and communications

shall be via a common non-polar communications bus. Transformers shall be factory

wired and installed.

2. Wiring:

a. Control wiring shall be installed in a system daisy chain configuration from outdoor

unit to indoor units and/or the remote controller. Control wiring to remote controllers

01/27/2020 190



WILTON, IOWA



shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that

unit.

b. Control wiring for schedule timers, system controllers, and centralized controllers shall

be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to system

controllers, to the power supply.

3. Wiring type:

a. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted shielded pair, stranded wire.

b. Network wiring shall be CAT-5e with RJ-45 connection.

c. Refer to Division 26 for additional requirements.

d. ALL CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE TEMPERATURE

CONTROL CONTRACTOR.

C. Remote Controllers

1. The centralized controller shall be capable of controlling all connected indoor units. The

centralized controller shall be approximately be powered from a power supply unit. The

centralized controller shall support operation superseding that of the remote controllers,

system configuration, daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, and

malfunction monitoring. Basic set of operation controls shall include on/off, operation mode

selection (cool, heat, auto, dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, and

airflow direction setting. Controller shall be able to enable or disable operation of local

remote controllers. The controller shall allow the user to define both daily and weekly

schedules with operations consisting of on/off, mode selection, temperature setting, vane

direction, fan speed, and permit/prohibit of remote controllers.

2. The centralized controller shall be equipped with one RJ-45 Ethernet port to support

interconnection with a network PC via a closed/direct Local Area Network.

3. The centralized Controller shall be capable of performing initial settings via a high-resolution,

backlit, color touch panel on the controller or via a PC using an initial setting browser.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units and outdoor units for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-

coil-unit installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan-coil units and outdoor units level and plumb.

B. Install fan-coil units and outdoor units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers.

D. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details

before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor. Coordinate final mounting

height with Owner.

E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection

requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.

01/27/2020 191



WILTON, IOWA



a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install

cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.

B. Ground electric convectors according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and

to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:


motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 01.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 192



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. This Contractor shall supply and install a complete Direct Digital Control (DDC) system as required

to accomplish the specified sequences of operation for control of heating, ventilating, air-

conditioning and other building equipment and systems as described on the drawings.

1. The building has an existign control system that will be extended and connected to for the

work related to this project. Contractor shall provide all necessary components for

extending and connecting to the existing system.

B. Refer to control diagrams on the drawings for equipment sequences required.

1.2 DDC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. BACnet®. The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer internetwork of

ANSI/ASHRAE 135 native BACnet® DDC devices. The control system shall also incorporate

input/output devices, mechanical/electrical automatic temperature control devices, enclosures,

interconnecting conduit and cabling.

B. The DDC system shall be modular in nature and implemented in such a manner that it can be

expanded in both capacity and functionality through the addition of DDC controllers, devices

and wiring.


A. DDC System Manufacturer shall be engaged full-time in the manufacture of equipment and

devices of the scope, size and service required. The DDC system Contractor shall specialize and

have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in the design, installation, programming and

operation of DDC systems of the scope, size and service specified.

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Workmanship, materials and equipment together with the resultant complete and operational

DDC System shall be in compliance with the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for the project

and the most restrictive of applicable local, state and federal codes and ordinances in

cooperation with these plans and specifications.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. All DDC System components provided under this specification shall operate under ambient

environmental conditions of -4°F to 131°F dry-bulb and 10% to 90% relative humidity, non-

condensing as a minimum. Sensors and control elements shall be constructed of material

suitable and rated for the media sensed under the ambient environmental temperature,

pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered for the installed locations.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in compliance with all General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions

and General Requirements of the project and in conjunction with the requirements of this

section.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The DDC System Manufacturer shall warranty all DDC controllers to be free of defect in material

and workmanship under normal operation and expected service as published by the

manufacturer in the unit’s performance specifications for a period of five (5) years.

01/27/2020 193



WILTON, IOWA



1.8 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL

A. All project specific software and documentation shall become the owner’s property including

but not limited to graphics, record drawings, database, application programming code and

documentation upon project acceptance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The following are approved DDC System manufacturers and product lines:

1. Northwest Mechanical Controls (Rich Krogmann 563-391-1344)

2.2 OPERATOR WORKSTATION

A. Provide BACNET® advanced operator workstation, web server software (with graphics) for

controlling all field-level equipment controllers, variable frequency drives (VFD), terminal unit

controllers, space mounted terminal unit controllers, communicating space sensors,

communicating duct sensors, temperature devices, humidity devices, current transmitters,

voltage transmitters, current switches, pressure switches, flow switches and relays.

2.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANELS

A. Provide wall mounted local control enclosures to be fully enclosed NEMA 1 (IEC IP20) at a

minimum with hinged door, key-lock latch and removable subpanels to house all control

components appropriate to the environment, service, and/or as required by the code enforcing

authorities and other AHJ.

2.4 CONTROL DEVICES

A. Provide all BACNET® field-level equipment controllers, variable frequency drives (VFD), terminal

unit controllers, space mounted terminal unit controllers, communicating space sensors,

communicating duct sensors, temperature devices, humidity devices, current transmitters,

voltage transmitters, current switches, pressure switches, flow switches and relays required for a

fully functional system.

2.5 INTERCONNECTING WIRING & RACEWAYS

A. All wiring regardless of service and/or voltage shall comply with the Contract Document

Electrical System Specifications, the National Electric Code (NEC), CSA C22.1-12 and any/all

applicable local codes and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). All insulated wire to be

copper conductors, UL labeled for 90 °C minimum service.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The DDC System, all of its components, its execution and compliance with this specification is the

responsibility of the DDC System Contractor. All control system components shall be installed in

locations as required to properly sense the controlled medium and perform according to the

intent of the specified sequence of operations and the requirements of the contract drawings

and this specification.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. The DDC System Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for control device

locations and additional work requirements.

01/27/2020 194



WILTON, IOWA




A. DDC System Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and

quality of workmanship. All work shall be inspected as required by local and/or regional code

enforcing authorities and/or AHJ.

3.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANELS

A. Unless otherwise directed by the AHJ, all temperature control panels and enclosures shall be

located as indicated such that visual observation and adjustment can be accomplished while

standing flatfooted on the floor in a convenient location adjacent to the equipment served.

Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by Chapter1 Article 100 Part A of

the NEC or CSA C22.1-12 Rule 2 (as applicable).

3.5 FIELD PROGRAMMING

A. This control contractor shall schedule time on site with the equipment manufacturer during

equipment start-up to coordinate, program and test all set points required by the control

diagrams in the contract documents. Multiple trips due to lack of coordination will be at the

expense of this control contractor.

3.6 TRAINING

A. The DDC System Contractor shall provide a minimum of 8 hours instruction on the adjustment,

operation and maintenance of the DDC System including all hardware and software provided.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 195



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.

3. Piping and tubing joining materials.

4. Valves.

5. Pressure regulators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,

unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied

spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.

2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models.

3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

01/27/2020 196



WILTON, IOWA




A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

B. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid

damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

C. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. Coordinate meter requirements

and location.

B. Service piping, meter, and regulator by utility company.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and

spiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

5. Mechanical Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited

to, the following:

1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc.

2) Smith-Blair, Inc.

b. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

c. Buna-nitrile seals.

d. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.

e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel

pipe to steel pipe.

f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped

with anode.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

01/27/2020 197



WILTON, IOWA



B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire

screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-

end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for

wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with

AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves

1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on

valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.


2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.

3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


following:

a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.

d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.


9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

01/27/2020 198



WILTON, IOWA





following:

a. Lee Brass Company.

b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Plug: Bronze.

4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.

6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.

7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS


1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-

1/2 and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.


following:

a. Actaris.

b. American Meter Company.

c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.

d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.

e. Invensys.

f. Maxitrol Company.

g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve

port.

6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.

7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping.

11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


following:

a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.

b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.

c. Harper Wyman Co.

01/27/2020 199



WILTON, IOWA



d. Maxitrol Company.

e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.

6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.

8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by


9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.


c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Jomar International Ltd.

e. Matco-Norca, Inc.

f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:



following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.


c. Matco-Norca, Inc.

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:



following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

01/27/2020 200



WILTON, IOWA



c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections

before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization devices

are turned off in piping section affected.

B. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.

2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

D. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator.

1. Refer to drawigns for location(s).

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance.

B. Install regulators with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

3.5 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified.

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding

operators.

01/27/2020 201



WILTON, IOWA



2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas

service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions

complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers

and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment

grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72

inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances

or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical

to inlet of each appliance.

3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

piping and valve identification.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior

Painting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,

and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat).

d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,

earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or

protective coating.

1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

01/27/2020 202



WILTON, IOWA



b. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).

c. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and

by procedures to match original factory finish.




1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

B. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and

fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.12 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

2. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following:



C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:



D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:



E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:



END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 203



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting

access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top of ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for

01/27/2020 204



WILTON, IOWA



static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams,"

for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support

intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and

fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing

requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-

pressure class unless otherwise indicated.


following:

a. LaPine Metal

b. Lindab Inc.

c. McGill AirFlow LLC.

d. SEMCO Incorporated.

e. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

f. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal

seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded

longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support

intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction

methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,

roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

01/27/2020 205



WILTON, IOWA



C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed

ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed

ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct

Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No.

3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts,

isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA

AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.

b. Johns Manville.

c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Owens Corning.

e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the

interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.

Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA

for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick stainless

steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less

than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive

coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of

duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal

nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge

overlapping.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding

12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18

inches longitudinally.

01/27/2020 206



WILTON, IOWA



7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have

either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings

at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.

b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500

fpm or where indicated.

8. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane

assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout

means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or

welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone

activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be

rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

01/27/2020 207



WILTON, IOWA



3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods

with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger

Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install

duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch

connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.

Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

01/27/2020 208



WILTON, IOWA



L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.

M. Duct sizes on the plans are the interior free area dimension. The contractor is responsible to

oversize duct accordingly to account for duct liner thickness to maintain free area dimensions as

listed on the drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and

treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule"

Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5,

"Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger

Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches

of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch,

outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

01/27/2020 209



WILTON, IOWA



3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"

and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC."

3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as indicated on the drawings:

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Roof top units, and indoor air handling units, and terminal units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.




2. Ducts Connected to Roof top units and indoor air-Handling Units:





D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.



2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:


b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.



e. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.

E. Liner:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner are to be of sufficient thickness and density to comply with

energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. All exposed and concealed Supply and Return ducts and plenums are to be lined, except

where indicated other on the drawings. Exhaust ducts connected to roof mounted Exhaust

01/27/2020 210



WILTON, IOWA



Fans (EF) are not lined. Exhaust ducts within 10’ of the penetration to the point where the

duct penetrates the exterior of the building shall be externally wrapped.

3. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.

4. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.

5. Transfer Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4,

"Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows."

Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer

segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

G. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees."

Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 211



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Flange connectors.

3. Turning vanes.

4. Flexible connectors.

5. Flexible ducts.

6. Duct accessory hardware.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 23 37 23 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.

2. Section 28 31 11 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA

90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable

materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet

metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other

imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for

concealed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed

ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized

sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

01/27/2020 212



WILTON, IOWA



2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

d. McGill AirFlow LLC.

e. Nailor Industries Inc.

f. Pottorff.

g. Ruskin Company.

2. Standard leakage rating.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length

of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel,

and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS



1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,

gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.5 TURNING VANES




2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Elgen Manufacturing.

01/27/2020 213



WILTON, IOWA



4. METALAIRE, Inc.

5. SEMCO Incorporated.


B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support

with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces

and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded

fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into

vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger

dimensions.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS




2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Elgen Manufacturing.

4. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum

sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.


F. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.

1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling.


2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS


following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. McGill AirFlow LLC.


B. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-

steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

01/27/2020 214



WILTON, IOWA



C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel

wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-

gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

2. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and

gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit

duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct

Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

G. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct

clamped or strapped in place.

H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

I. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed.

3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 215



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.

2. In-line centrifugal fans


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Unit shall be suitable for being operated by a variable frequency drive.



characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,



A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


B. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant

kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

01/27/2020 216



WILTON, IOWA



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS


following:

1. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

3. Loren Cook Company.

4. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum

base with venturi inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

D. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent. (Refer to schedule on drawing for locations)

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan

housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops. Refer to drawings for locations.

E. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on the drawings.

2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS


following:

1. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

3. Loren Cook Company.

4. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and

support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on

outside of fan housing.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

E. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent.

2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

3. Vibration isolation hangers

4. Insulated, low leak, aluminum damper with end switches

5. Access Panels

6. Corrosion resistant fasteners

F. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on drawings

01/27/2020 217



WILTON, IOWA



2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will

not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. Refer to drawing schedule for additional details.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound

Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing

Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200

"Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping

and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."




1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel

free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust

belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

01/27/2020 218



WILTON, IOWA



8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for

testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

D. Lubricate bearings.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 219



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 233713 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers.

2. Contractor is responsible to field verify neck sizes and installation requirements for all diffusers

indicated for replacement on the drawings prior to ordering units.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS

A. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers:



a. Carnes.

b. Hart & Cooley Inc.

c. Krueger.

d. METALAIRE, Inc.

e. Nailor Industries Inc.

f. Price Industries.

g. Titus.

h. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,

"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

equipment.

01/27/2020 220



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 233713 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713 - 2

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate

units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation,

notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,

before starting air balancing.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 221



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 237423.16 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS 237423.16 - 1

SECTION 237423.16 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the

following components and accessories:

1. Direct-expansion cooling.

2. Hot-gas reheat.

3. Gas furnace.

4. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section.

5. Roof curbs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. ECM: Electrically commutated motor.

C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during

cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the

air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.

D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is

defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated

through the system.

E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-

station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on

the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the

air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide

cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating

operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or

ventilating apparatus.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities,

dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.

2. Roof openings

3. Roof curbs and flashing.

01/27/2020 222



WILTON, IOWA



B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and



A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety.

2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from

date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less

than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Refer to drawings for additional details.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. AAON, Inc.

2. Valent

3. Trane

4. Daikin

5. York

2.2 RTU-1

A. General: The units shall be convertible airflow. The operating range shall be between 115°F and

0°F in cooling as standard from the factory for units with microprocessor controls. Cooling

performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures. All units shall be factory

assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R-410A, and 100 percent run tested to check

cooling operation, fan and blower rotation, and control sequence before leaving the factory.

Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units shall

be UL listed and labeled, classified in accordance for Central Cooling Air Conditioners.

01/27/2020 223



WILTON, IOWA



B. Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior

surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel

finish. Units surface shall be tested 672 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117.

Service panels shall have lifting handles and be removed and reinstalled by removing two

fasteners while providing a water and air tight seal. All exposed vertical panels and top covers in

the indoor air section shall be insulated with a cleanable foil-faced, fire-retardant permanent,

odorless glass fiber material. The base of the unit shall be insulated with 1/2 inch, foil-faced,

closed-cell insulation. All insulation edges shall be either captured or sealed. The unit’s base pan

shall have no penetrations within the perimeter of the curb other than the raised 1 1/8 inch high

downflow supply/return openings to provide an added water integrity precaution, if the

condensate drain backs up. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting,

with forklift capabilities on three sides of the unit. The top cover shall be one piece construction

or, where seams exist, it shall be double-hemmed and gasket-sealed. The ribbed top adds extra

strength and enhances water removal from unit top.

C. Filters: Provide unit with pleated MERV 8 filters.

D. Compressors: Units shall have direct-drive, hermetic, scroll type compressors with centrifugal type

oil pumps. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or

minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. Internal overloads shall be provided with the scroll

compressors. Crankcase heaters shall be included units. Compressors shall be as scheduled.

E. Indoor Fan: All indoor fan motors meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT).

F. Outdoor Fan: The outdoor fan shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw-

through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motor shall be permanently lubricated and

shall have built-in thermal overload protection.

G. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Internally finned, 5/16" copper tubes mechanically bonded to

a configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to

ensure the pressure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser coil shall be leak tested to 600

psig. The assembled unit shall be leak tested to 465 psig. Provide unit with a removable,

reversible, double-sloped condensate drain pan with through the base condensate drain.

H. Controls: Unit shall be completely factory-wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure

lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Unit shall provide an external location for mounting a

fused disconnect device. Microprocessor controls shall provide for all 24V control functions. The

resident control algorithms shall make all heating, cooling, and/or ventilating decisions in

response to electronic signals from sensors measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures. A

centralized microprocessor shall provide anti-short cycle timing and time delay between

compressors to provide a higher level of machine protection. 24-volt electromechanical control

circuit shall include control transformer and contactor

1. Refer to control drawings for points and coordination.

2. Provide unit with BACnet communication for connection to DDC.

I. High Pressure Control: All units include High Pressure Cutout as standard.

J. Refrigerant Circuit: Each refrigerant circuit offer thermal expansion valve as standard.

K. Gas Heating: The heating section shall have a progressive tubular heat exchanger design using

stainless steel burners and corrosion resistant steel throughout. An induced draft combustion

blower shall be used to pull the combustion products through the firing tubes. The heater shall use

a direct spark ignition (DSI) system. On initial call for heat, the combustion blower shall purge the

heat exchanger for 20 seconds before ignition After three unsuccessful ignition attempts, the

entire heating system shall be locked out until manually reset at the thermostat/zone sensor. Units

shall be suitable for use with natural gas and also comply with the California requirement for low

NOx emissions.

L. Dehumidification: Units shall be equipped with internally finned, 5/16" copper tubes mechanically

bonded to configured aluminum plate fins. The coil shall be 2 row with a minimum of 16 fins per

inch. Dehumidification shall be achieved by routing hot refrigerant gas from the discharge line of

the compressor through the reheat coil.

01/27/2020 224



WILTON, IOWA



M. 100% Economizer: Provide unit with 100% economizer and controls. The assembly includes fully

modulating 0-100 percent motor and dampers, minimum position setting, preset linkage, wiring

harness with plug, spring return actuator and fixed dry bulb control. Optional solid state or

differential enthalpy control shall be available for either factory or field installation. The

economizer comes in the shipping position and shall be moved to the operating position by the

installing contractor.

1. Unit to come with Exhaust fan and controls for maintaining slight positive pressure (0.05 Inch-

WC).

N. Fans:

1. Supply Fan motor shall be direct drive type with factory provided and installed Variable

Frequency Drive. All motors shall be thermally protected. All indoor fan motors meet the U.S.

Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPACT).

O. Roof curb: Provide unit with factory roof curb. The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the

downflow unit and provide support and a water tight installation when installed properly. The roof

curb design shall allow field-fabricated rectangular supply/return ductwork to be connected

directly to the curb. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements. Curb shall be shipped

knocked down for field assembly and shall include wood nailer strips.

1. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and

factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

a. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1) Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.

2) Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner

when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in

cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a

temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric

depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

3. Curb Height: 30 inches (refer to drawings/schedules for exceptions)

P. Humidity Sensor: Provide humidity sensor to monitor the humidity levels in the space for Hot Gas

Reheat Dehumidification for RTU’s.

Q. Demand Control Ventilation: Provide CO2 sensor and controls for demand control ventilation

sequence.

2.3 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. As scheduled on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before

equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

01/27/2020 225



WILTON, IOWA



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's

"Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for

Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and

flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to

upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest

roof drain or area drain. Install per requirements per local authority.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 11 23 "Facility Natural-Gas

Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and

shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the

general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.

2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb. Refer to detail on drawings for additional information.

3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air

Duct Accessories."

4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.

5. Install sound curb per manufacturers recommendations. All connections to be thru flexible

means.



and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report

results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.




equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory service representative to perform startup service. Contractor startup is not

acceptable.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do

the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.

2. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.

3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans.

01/27/2020 226



WILTON, IOWA



4. Inspect internal insulation.

5. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

6. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

7. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

8. Verify that filters are installed.

9. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris.

10. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.

11. Connect and purge gas line.

12. Remove packing from vibration isolators.

13. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers.

14. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings.

15. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding.

16. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

17. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Start refrigeration system.

b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature.

c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

18. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

19. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.

20. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for

peak efficiency.

a. Measure gas pressure on manifold.

b. Inspect operation of power vents.

c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.

d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.

e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen

concentration.

f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate

and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

21. Calibrate thermostats.

22. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

23. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

24. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum

of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:

a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature.

d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

25. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and

normal and emergency shutdown.

26. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan

curve.

a. Supply-air volume.

b. Return-air volume.

c. Relief-air volume.

d. Outdoor-air intake volume.

27. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air

intake.

28. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect

the following:

a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger.

01/27/2020 227



WILTON, IOWA



b. Low-temperature safety operation.

c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm.

d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.

e. Relief-air fan operation.

f. Smoke and firestat alarms.

29. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing

filters with new filters.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,


two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution

systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs and ERVs. Refer to Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and

Training."

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 228



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS 238239.13 - 1

SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This project will require extended work hours in order to meet the completion date – see

specification section 00210 for phasing and schedule requirements.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary

conditions and division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM.

B. CWP: COLD WORKING PRESSURE.

C. PTFE: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE PLASTIC.

D. TFE: TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE PLASTIC.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data: for each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

3. Include location and size of each field connection.

4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

6. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls.

7. Wiring diagrams: power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: for each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Samples for initial selection: finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for verification: finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater indicated with factory-

applied color finishes.


A. Operation and maintenance data: for cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation,


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Berko; marley engineered products.

2. Chromalox, inc.

3. Indeeco.

4. Markel products company; tpi corporation.

5. Marley engineered products.

01/27/2020 229

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456838716&mf=95&src=wd







WILTON, IOWA



6. Qmark; marley engineered products.

7. Raywall

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with AHRI 440.

B. Electrical components, devices, and accessories: listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


C. Comply with ul 2021.

2.3 CABINETS

A. cabinet shall be of heavy-duty, 18 ga. Minimum cold rolled steel. The heater front cover shall be

hinged for simplified maintenance. The cover shall be secured to the cabinet by a maximum of

two screws. The grille shall be an extruded aluminum bar that prevents insertion of foreign

objects. Inlet and outlet grilles can be field changeable for 12 air inlet and outlet combinations.

Cabinet finish shall be an epoxy/polyester powder paint in either white or almond. Color by

architect.

B. Refer to drawings/schedules for recessed/semi-recessed units. Provide necessary trim and

installation kits.

2.4 MOTOR AND BLOWER

A. Motor and blower assembly shall be a squirrel cage fan that is beltless. The fans shall be powered

by motors with permanently lubricated ball bearing. The blower wheel shall be mounted directly

on the motor shaft. The decibel ratings of the assembly shall not exceed 50 dba. The motor shall

be a two speed, 1/15 hp with automatic reset overload protection.

2.5 FILTERS

A. Air filters shall be located ahead of the motor assembly and blower to assure clean air

circulation. Provide replaceable (throw-away) MERV 7 filters.

2.6 COILS

A. heating elements shall be of finned tubular type and located directly down stream of the blower

discharge air for uniform heating.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Thermal cutouts shall be built-in to every heater for temperature protection. The automatic reset

thermal cutouts shall directly interrupt power to the elements without the use of relays. Optional –

manual reset thermal cutout for back-up temperature protection.

B. Built-in, single pole, tamperproof thermostat.

C. Refer to drawings for control sequences and points list.

D. Electrical connection: factory-wired motors and controls for a single field connection.

E. Capacity and characteristics: refer to drawings for schedules.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater

installation.

01/27/2020 230




WILTON, IOWA




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and

applications are specified in section 07920 "joint sealants."

B. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90a.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match

lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with drawings

and room details before installation.

D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of substantial completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to section 260526 "grounding and bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to section "conductors and cables."



1. Operational test: after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper


2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and

electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 231



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 2000 V and less.2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 2000 V and less.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLESA. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable

Marking and Application Guide."C. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable used in VFC circuits.D. Conductors: Aluminum and copper, complying with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

1. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2.E. Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICESA. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for

application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONSA. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and

larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODSA. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in

raceway.G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-

mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

01/27/2020 232



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLESA. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not

deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONSA. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.

If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and

identify as spare conductor.

3.6 FIRESTOPPINGA. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-

resistance rating of assembly.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 233



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARYA. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.3. Foundation steel electrodes.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.2 CONDUCTORSA. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable

Code or authorities having jurisdiction.B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches

wide and 1/16 inch thick.7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with

9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.3 CONNECTORSA. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used

and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being

joined and installation conditions.D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and

01/27/2020 234



WILTON, IOWA



long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODESA. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONSA. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG

and larger unless otherwise indicated.B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as

indicated.1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished

floor unless otherwise indicated.C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICEA. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus.

Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDINGA. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.B. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment

grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.4 INSTALLATIONA. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or

required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise

indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each

other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any

adjacent parts.2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required,

use a bolted clamp.D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a

01/27/2020 235



WILTON, IOWA



dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at

intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.F. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically

conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and

without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and

other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.C. Prepare test and inspection reports.D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 236



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTSA. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Material: Galvanized steel.2. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONA. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and

systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for

Electrical Systems."C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs,

and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support

system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for

01/27/2020 237



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2

fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATIONA. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMTs may be supported by

openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70.C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be

adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on

solid masonry units.4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69.6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards,

disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.

3.3 CONCRETE BASESA. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than

supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement

requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 238



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.4. Surface raceways.5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGSA. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.C. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast.b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGSA. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.E. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.F. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.G. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

01/27/2020 239



WILTON, IOWA



H. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.I. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.J. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.K. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERSA. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and

sized according to NFPA 70.1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down

straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.C. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYSA. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's

standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETSA. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet

locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.2. Type: Fully adjustable.3. Shape: Rectangular.4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes

designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron

with gasketed cover.I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.K. Gangable boxes are allowed.L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with

flush latch unless otherwise indicated.1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front,

finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.3. Key latch to match panelboards.4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

01/27/2020 240



WILTON, IOWA



5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRINGA. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company.b. Carson Industries LLC.c. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.d. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating

consistent with enclosure and handhole location.5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure,

fixed installation in enclosure wall.8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger:

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURESA. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with

SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or

manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000

and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATIONA. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC.2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC.3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in

01/27/2020 241


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457034017






WILTON, IOWA



institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings

or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers

and supports.E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring

conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install

conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.H. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an

enclosure.J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed

compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

Q. Surface Raceways:1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points.2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48

inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

01/27/2020 242



WILTON, IOWA



R. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

S. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.U. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature

change.3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of

straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to

manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

V. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

Z. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or

mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUITA. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

01/27/2020 243



WILTON, IOWA



3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling

with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate

building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXESA. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch

sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other

enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below grade at Project site> below

grade.E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as

required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 FIRESTOPPINGA. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 244



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Underground-line warning tape.5. Warning labels and signs.6. Instruction signs.7. Equipment identification labels, including arc-flash warning labels.8. Miscellaneous identification products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Comply with ASME A13.1.B. Comply with NFPA 70.C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label

printers, shall comply with UL 969.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTSA. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

2.3 LABELSA. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a

clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.

B. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceways they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.

C. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, polyester flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.2. Polyester, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-

sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.a. Nominal Size: 3.5-by-5-inch.

3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.4. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer

manufacturer.

01/27/2020 245



WILTON, IOWA



2.4 TAPES AND STENCILS:A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine

printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.B. Underground-Line Warning Tape

1. Tape:a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed

to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.2. Color and Printing:

a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5.b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE".c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

2.5 SignsA. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.

B. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:1. Engraved legend.2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. inches, minimum 1/16-inch-.b. For signs larger than 20 sq. inches, 1/8 inch thick.c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTSA. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements.

Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts

and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of

substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.D. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with

operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

01/27/2020 246



WILTON, IOWA



F. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

I. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULEA. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes,

manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.1. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for

ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities

having jurisdiction permit.b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum

distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

B. Install instructional sign, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

C. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

D. Conductors To Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting,

communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.

F. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment,

including, but not limited to, the following:a. Power-transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

H. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive thermal transfer vinyl labels.1. Comply with NFPA 70E and ANSI Z535.4.

01/27/2020 247



WILTON, IOWA



2. Comply with Section 260574 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study" requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm unless equipment is provided with its own identification.1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing

from the floor.d. Unless labels are provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten them with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment To Be Labeled:a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard

manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.d. Switchboards.e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer,

feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.f. Substations.g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.h. Motor-control centers.i. Enclosed switches.j. Enclosed circuit breakers.k. Enclosed controllers.l. Variable-speed controllers.m. Push-button stations.n. Power-transfer equipment.o. Contactors.p. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 248



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Photoelectric switches.2. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls.3. Indoor occupancy sensors.4. Low voltage room controllers. 5. High bay occupancy controllers.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHESA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Intermatic, Inc.4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within

that range.3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.

2.2 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING SWITCHING CONTROLSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.

01/27/2020 249









WILTON, IOWA



2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Watt Stopper.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Switching Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate power pack, to detect changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying with UL 773A.

Sensor is powered by the power pack.4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for Insert value-A

tungsten at 120-V ac, and for Insert value hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

6. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling.7. Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with deadband adjustment of 25, 50, and 75 percent above the "on" set

point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and "off" set points.8. Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings check.9. Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct.10. Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them

off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure.c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level

is present.C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body

01/27/2020 250











WILTON, IOWA



that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when

mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot-high

ceiling.D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected

ultrasonic energy .1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in

either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft.

when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000

sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft.

when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-

foot-high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic

detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body

that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application, and shall comply with California Title 24.2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-

W incandescent.C. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.3. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off."4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage.5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch

prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and

01/27/2020 251








WILTON, IOWA



helps eliminate false "off" switching.D. Wall-Switch Sensor:

1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..2. Sensing Technology: PIR.3. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off."4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage;5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc. The switch

prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.7. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes.8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and

helps eliminate false "off" switching.

2.5 DIGITAL ROOM CONTROLLERA. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide LEVITON MZD30-101 or comparable

product as approved by engineer. B. Plenum-rated controllers with line voltage relay(s) and 0-10 volt dimming outputs.C. Capable of integrating multiple control components including daylight sensors, occupancy sensors, and

manual switches for energy-efficient lighting control options.

2.6 HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.2. Watt Stopper.3. Greengate4. Leviton

B. General Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and ballasts indicated.1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when unoccupied;

with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.

3. Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours, automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of continuous dimming.

4. Power: Line voltage.5. Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F.6. Mounting: Threaded pipe.7. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.8. Detector Technology: PIR.9. Power and dimming control from the luminaire ballast that has been modified to include the dimming

capacitor.C. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting heights from 12 to

50 feet.D. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment tool for sensor

positioning and power port connectors.

2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLESA. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply

with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than

No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

01/27/2020 252

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456803060&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456803066&mf=&src=wd



WILTON, IOWA



C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller thanNo. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings

or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATIONA. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne

vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATIONA. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors

according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise

indicated.D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and

outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTINGA. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide

on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay

to suit Owner's operations.2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

01/27/2020 253



WILTON, IOWA



3.7 DEMONSTRATIONA. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain lighting control devices.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 254



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Distribution panelboards.2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.D. HID: High-intensity discharge.E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.F. SPD: Surge protective device.G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment

features, and ratings.3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts,

corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.10. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.11. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device

included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

01/27/2020 255



WILTON, IOWA



1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that

allows adjustments.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALSA. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for

storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTSA. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including

clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.D. Comply with NFPA 70.E. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box

dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and

pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.F. Incoming Mains:

1. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main breaker.G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter.

H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required, for larger

conductors.

01/27/2020 256



WILTON, IOWA



4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the panelboard.

5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.

I. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures, wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact requirements.

J. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Five percent.

K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as

shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have

short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.

2.2 POWER PANELBOARDSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton.2. Siemens Energy.3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit

breakers.E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit

breakers.F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent

units.D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICESA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

01/27/2020 257















WILTON, IOWA



2. MCCB Features and Accessories:a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings.d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting

loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits.f. Shunt Trip: 24-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated

voltage.g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.5 IDENTIFICATIONA. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and

number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with transparent

plastic protective cover.1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other

circuits.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURESA. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test,

inspection, maintenance, and operation.B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include

relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits

in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been

subjected to water saturation.D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates

walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.F. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.G. Mounting panelboards with space behind is recommended for damp, wet, or dirty locations. The steel

slotted supports in the following paragraph provide an even mounting surface and the recommended space behind to prevent moisture or dirt collection.

H. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth. Orient steel slotted supports

01/27/2020 258



WILTON, IOWA



vertically.I. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque

screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.J. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground.

Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.

K. Install filler plates in unused spaces.L. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be

ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

M. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

N. Mount spare fuse cabinet in accessible location.

3.3 IDENTIFICATIONA. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying

with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's

final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air circuit breakers and low-voltage surge arrestors stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers. [Do not perform] [Perform] optional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that

describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure

load balancing and make circuit changes. Prior to making circuit changes to achieve load balancing, inform Architect of effect on phase color coding.1. Measure loads during period of normal facility operations.

01/27/2020 259



WILTON, IOWA



2. Perform circuit changes to achieve load balancing outside normal facility operation schedule or at times directed by the Architect. Avoid disrupting services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After changing circuits to achieve load balancing, recheck loads during normal facility operations. Record load readings before and after changing circuits to achieve load balancing.

4. Tolerance: Maximum difference between phase loads, within a panelboard, shall not exceed 20 percent.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 260



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Weather-resistant receptacles.3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label

warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton (Arrow Hart).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTSA. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.B. Comply with NFPA 70.C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the

following conditions:1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLESA. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R,

UL 498, and FS W-C-596.1. Tamper Resistant.

01/27/2020 261








WILTON, IOWA



2.4 TAMPER-RESISTANT DUPLEX GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A:A. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire,

and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle.B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.C. Type: Non-feed through.D. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.E. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article.

2.5 TAMPER-RESISTANT DUPLEX AND USB CHARGING RECEPTACLES:A. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-plated, brass mounting

strap. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the line voltage receptacle.B. Line Voltage Receptacles: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R.C. USB Receptacles: Dual USB Type A, 5 V dc, and 2.1 A per receptacle (minimum).D. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 1310, USB 3.0 devices, and FS W-C-596.E. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article.

2.6 TAMPER- AND WEATHER-RESISTANT, GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A:A. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire,

and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face.

B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R.C. Type: Non-feed through.D. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and UL 943 Class A.E. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" and "Receptacles

in Damp or Wet Locations" articles.

2.7 TOGGLE SWITCHESA. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

2.8 WALL-BOX DIMMERSA. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible

frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

2.9 WALL PLATESA. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.10 FINISHESA. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

01/27/2020 262



WILTON, IOWA



B. Coordination with Other Trades:1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and

do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and

other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the

joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or

nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300,

without pigtails.4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before

building finishing operations were complete.2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible

moment.4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor

tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting

screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes

when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.F. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers'

device listing conditions in the written instructions.G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with

grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLESA. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATIONA. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved

machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

01/27/2020 263



WILTON, IOWA



3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor

connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

B. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 264



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).4. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. NC: Normally closed.B. NO: Normally open.C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALSA. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for

storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of

each size and type.2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

01/27/2020 265



WILTON, IOWA



1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices,

components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and

circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and

adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHESA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:1. Eaton.2. General Electric Company.3. Siemens Industry, Inc.4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for

copper and aluminum neutral conductors.3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before

switch blades open.5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHESA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton.2. General Electric Company.3. Siemens Industry, Inc.4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 or 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for

copper and aluminum neutral conductors.3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before

switch blades open.

01/27/2020 266













WILTON, IOWA



4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERSA. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton.2. General Electric Company.3. Siemens Industry, Inc.4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Features and Accessories:1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads;

Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

2.4 ENCLOSURESA. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with

environmental conditions at installed location.1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise

indicated.B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for

Electrical Systems."C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary

blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.D. Install fuses in fusible devices.E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATIONA. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

01/27/2020 267








WILTON, IOWA



3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit

breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 268



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 265119 - LIGHTING 265119 - 1

SECTION 265119 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and


1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

1.3 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting

structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied

as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 100 mph.

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years.

c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation.

2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.

4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.

5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.

6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a

qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be

certified by manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.

2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the

experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the

01/27/2020 269



WILTON, IOWA



applicable IES testing standards.

B. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

C. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among

luminaires.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before

shipping.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Standards:

1. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class

and division of hazard by an NRTL.

2. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.

3. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.

4. User Replaceable Lamps:

a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79.

b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

C. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 4100 K.

D. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70.

E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.

F. Internal driver.

2.2 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and

lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80

percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects

lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright

glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of

unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral

audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

01/27/2020 270



WILTON, IOWA



2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with

UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.

F. Lamp Base: Comply with ANSI C81.61.

G. Bulb Shape: Complying with ANSI C79.1.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated.

3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating

conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames,

lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in

operating position.

C. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will

be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating.

c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components

are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or

installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent

deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole

Selection" Article.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and

brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection

strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use

stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless

otherwise indicated.

3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless-

steel captive screws.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel

01/27/2020 271



WILTON, IOWA



and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as

luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded

attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before

luminaire installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is

sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight.

2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping.

3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall.

4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of

luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box.

2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of

luminaire.

3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Attached to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Ceiling mount with two 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable supports.

H. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet

box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet

box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod wire

support for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building

structure.

I. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box.

2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,

01/27/2020 272



WILTON, IOWA



spaced near corners of luminaire.

3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building

structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

J. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for

wiring connections.

K. All luminaires shall be clean and free of all construction debris at project Substantial Completion.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry

has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer

from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 273



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

270000 - 1

SECTION 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Division 27 Specifications are provided to define the standards and criteria to be used to bid,

plan, furnish, install, test, and document communication systems for Wilton Community School

District's Lobby Addition. These specifications shall form the basis for implementation of the

procurement, installation, inspection, and close-out process.

B. Division 27 has been designed and developed based on NFPA 70 (NEC), National Electrical

Safety Code (NESC), Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers (IEEE), and a combination of

ANSI/TIA Telecommunication Standards, and BICSI methodologies. The requirements within those

documents are not superseded herein unless specifically stated. NEC and NESC code

requirements are unable to be superseded by this document at any time. ANSI/TIA standards and

BICSI methodologies are guidelines and recommendations for best practices and may be

superseded, as specified, or may be made more stringent by this document.

C. Any use of the word “shall” marks a mandatory requirement. Use of the word “may” or “should”

suggests optional elements. All conflicts within this document shall be resolved by the

Construction Manager in consultation with the Design Team. The standards of Wilton Community

School District shall take precedence in the resolution of any dispute.

D. Unauthorized changes and/or deviations from these specifications, regardless of scale, may result

in re-design, reconstruction, or re-installation of communications elements at the contractor’s

expense. Contractors shall obtain formal written approval prior to bidding and prior to installation

in order to deviate from these specifications or from ANSI/TIA standards and BICSI methodologies.

Contractors shall not deviate from NEC and NESC requirements.

E. Division 27 Specifications address information transport pathways, multiple different types of

communication systems, spaces, media, grounding, identification, testing, and documentation

requirements in support of multiple information transport infrastructures.

F. Specific responsibilities of Division 27 include, but are not limited to:

1. Installation of the intra-building pathways, cabling, and coordinating space requirements

necessary to house the communication systems and associated electronic information

transport equipment. Pathways and spaces shall be provided to support the known systems

and cabling requirements, as well as provisions for those that may be required in the future

for growth purposes.

2. The procurement and installation of each communications system and the associated

components and cabling to create a fully functional system.

3. Thorough testing shall be conducted of each individual communications system to illustrate

compliance with specific performance requirements.

4. Definition and establishment of administration and labeling schemes, conforming to Owner’s

requirements.

5. Securing all necessary permits and licenses, payment of all fees, and provision of all

construction work notifications.

6. Compliance with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations.

7. Mandatory project manager attendance at a weekly project status meeting with the

Construction Manager.

8. It is the intent of the project drawings and specifications to provide complete and fully

functional Division 27 communication systems, ready for use. Any item, not specifically

shown in the project drawings or called for in the project specifications but normally

required for a complete system, is to be considered a part of this contract.

G. System Continuity:

01/27/2020 274



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 2

1. Reconnect all existing items that remain in use. Provide all materials and labor required to

retain continuity of existing circuits or systems that are disrupted by these alterations even

though not indicated on the drawings.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS


Conditions and Division 00 & 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. The following documents shall also be considered as a part of and shall relate directly to this

section:

1. Section 270505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Section 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

3. Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

4. Section 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND

CABLING

5. Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

6. Section 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES

7. Section 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

8. Section 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

9. Section 274100 - AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS

10. Section 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. The following definitions are applicable to the work as indicated and as shown herein:

1. ACR: Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ration

2. ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act

3. AFF: Above Finished Floor

4. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

5. ASTM: American Society for Testing & Materials (ASTM International)

6. AWG: American Wire Gauge

7. BCT: Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications

8. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.

9. BTU: British Thermal Unit

10. dB: Decibel

11. dBmV: Decibel Millivolt

12. EF: Entrance Facility

13. EIA: Electronic Industries Association

14. ELFEXT: Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk

15. EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility

16. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference

17. ER: Equipment Room

18. FCC: Federal Communications Commission

19. FD: Floor Distributor

20. FEXT: Far-End Crosstalk

21. F/FTP: Overall foil screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.

22. F/UTP: Overall foil screened cable with unshielded twisted pair.

23. FTP: Shielded twisted pair.

24. Freq: Frequency

25. GE: Grounding Equalizer (replacing TBBIBC)

26. HC: Horizontal Cross-Connect

27. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

28. Hz: Hertz

29. IC: Intermediate Cross-Connect

01/27/2020 275



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 3

30. IDC: Insulation Displacement Connector

31. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame

32. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

33. ISO: International Organization for Standardization

34. LAN: Local Area Network

35. LCD: Liquid Crystal Display

36. Mbps: Megabits per second

37. MC: Main Cross-Connect

38. MDF: Main Distribution Frame

39. MHz: Megahertz

40. NEC: National Electrical Code, NFPA 70

41. NESC: National Electric Safety Code

42. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

43. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory

44. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration

45. OSP: Outside cable Plant

46. PR: Pair

47. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer

48. RFI: Radio Frequency Interference

49. RH: Relative Humidity

50. RMC: Rigid Metallic Conduit

51. RNC: Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit

52. S/FTP: Overall braid screened cable with foil screened twisted pair

53. S/UTP: Overall braid screened cable with unshielded twisted pair

54. SE: Service Entrance

55. SFP: Small Form-Factor Pluggable Transceiver

56. TBB: Telecommunication Bonding Backbone

57. TBBIBC: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone Interconnecting Bonding Conductor

58. TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar

59. TIA: Telecommunications Industry Association

60. TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar

61. TO: Telecommunications Outlet

62. TR: Telecommunications Room

63. TV: Television

64. UL: Underwriters Laboratory

65. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply

66. WAO: Work Area Outlet

67. WAP: Wireless Access Point

68. UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair

1.4 DEFINITIONS


1. Attenuation: The decrease in power of a signal, light beam, or light wave, either absolutely

or as a fraction of a reference value. Attenuation is the opposite of gain and is measured in

decibels (dB).

2. Backbone System: The cabling and connecting hardware that provides interconnection

between Telecommunications Rooms, Equipment Room, and Entrance Facilities.

3. BCT: Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications - A conductor that interconnects the

building’s service equipment (power ground) to the telecommunications grounding system.

4. Conduit Chase Pipe: Short section of bushed EMT conduit with sufficient size and capacity to

support horizontal cabling bundles from ceiling space, through ceiling tile, onto the ladder

tray system connecting wall to rack or cabinet.

01/27/2020 276



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 4

5. Cross Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their

interconnection or cross-connection.

6. Design Team: A group of individuals comprised of Architect(s) and Engineer(s) involved in

assembling the contract documents known as the drawings and specifications.

7. EF: Entrance facility - A location within a building for both public and private network service

cables. A facility that provides all necessary mechanical and electrical services for the entry

of telecommunications cables into a building and that complies with all relevant regulations.

Also referred to as SE: Service Entrance.

8. ER: Equipment Room - A centralized space designed for telecommunications equipment

that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment therein is considered distinct from a IDF

(Telecommunications Room) because of its nature or complexity. Also frequently referred to

as MCR or MDF.

9. GE: Grounding Equalizer - A conductor that interconnects elements of the

telecommunications grounding infrastructure (formerly Telecommunications Bonding

Backbone Interconnecting Bonding Conductor).

10. Horizontal System: The cabling between, and including, the TO (Telecommunications Outlet)

connector and the HC (Horizontal Cross-connect) in the Telecommunications Room.

11. HC: Horizontal Cross-Connect - A group of connectors, such as patch panel or punch down

block, that allows equipment and backbone cabling to be cross-connected with patch

cords or jumpers. Floor Distributor (FD) is the international term for HC. Also frequently

referred to as IDF.

12. Jack: Also commonly called an “outlet”, it is the fixed, female connector.

13. J-Hook: A supporting device for horizontal cables that is shaped like a “J”. It is attached to

some building structures. Horizontal cables are laid in the opening formed by the “J” to

provide support for cables.

14. Minor Pathway Support Hardware: Anchors, support brackets, clamps, clips, cable ties, D-

rings, rack screws, velcro straps and etc. used to dress and secure cabling, conduits and

surface raceways.

15. Plug: Also commonly called a “connector”, it is the removable, male telecommunications

connector.

16. RF: Radio Frequency - The area (or band) of the electromagnetic spectrum where most

radio communication takes place, typically from 100 Khz to 100 GHz. A frequency at which

coherent electromagnetic radiation of energy is useful for communication purposes. Analog

electrical signals sent on cable or over the air. Conventional (broadcast) television and

radio, as well as cable TV, deliver RF signals to your television/radio.

17. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

18. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent

damage, and deliver to Owner.

19. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and

reinstall where indicated.

20. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed

and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed

and reinstalled.

21. Screen: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.

22. SE: Service Entrance - An entrance to a building for both public and private network service

cables. A facility that provides all necessary mechanical and electrical services for the entry

of telecommunications cables into a building and that complies with all relevant regulations.

Also referred to as EF: Entrance Facility.

23. Shield: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a group of conductors.

24. Splice: A joining of conductors meant to be permanent. A device that joins conducting or

transmitting media. Also referred to as straight splice.

01/27/2020 277



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 5

25. TBB: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone - A copper conductor used to connect the

Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) to the Telecommunications Grounding

Busbar (TGB).

26. TE: Telecommunications Enclosure - A case or housing for telecommunications cable

terminations and cross-connect cabling.

27. TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar - A common point of connection for

telecommunications system and equipment bonding to ground, and located in the

telecommunications room or equipment room.

28. TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar - A bus bar placed in a convenient and

accessible location and bonded, by means of the bonding conductor for

telecommunications, to the building service equipment (power) ground.

29. TO: Telecommunications Outlet - A device placed at the user workstation for termination of

horizontal media and for connectivity of network equipment. Also referred to as WAO (Work

Area Outlet).

30. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.

31. WAO: Work Area Outlet - A device placed at the user workstation for termination of

horizontal media and for connectivity of network equipment. Also referred to as TO

(Telecommunications Outlet).

1.5 CODE REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. All work shall be in compliance with the following codes and agencies. Nothing contained within

these specifications shall be misconstrued to permit work not in conformance with the most

stringent of applicable codes and standards. It is assumed that bidders have access to, and

specific knowledge of, the listed reference materials in order to ensure conformity with them.

1. National Electrical Code (NEC)

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. International Building Code (IBC)

5. Iowa Administrative Code

6. Federal, State, and Local Codes.

7. National Electronic Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

8. Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers (IEEE)

9. American National Standards Institute/ Industries Association Telecommunication/ Electronic

Industries Association (ANSI/TIA/EIA)

10. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)

11. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

B. All new materials, equipment, and installation practices shall meet the requirements of the

following standards, unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Design Team.

1. TIA-568.0-D - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises (December 2015,

July 2017 addendum)

2. TIA-568.1-D - Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard (September

2015, March 2018 addendum)

3. TIA-568-C.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components

Standards (August 2009)

4. TIA-569-E - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (May 2019)

5. TIA-606-C - Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure (June 2017)

6. TIA-607-C - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer

Premises (November 2015)

7. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC)

8. BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 13th, or most recent, edition.

9. BICSI - Information Transport Systems Installation Manual 7th, or most recent, edition

10. Federal, State, and local codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.

01/27/2020 278



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 6

a. Perform all work in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements that is governing

the work and as fully part of the specifications attached.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sequencing: Ensure that any wide area network connectivity cutover is achieved in a

coordinated and orderly manner.

B. All Division 27 Contractor Project Managers shall schedule and conduct a coordination meeting

with Wilton Community School District Information Technology Department to confirm and

coordinate scope of work requirements prior to commencement of work. Project meetings shall

be scheduled through the Construction Manager.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 1 for exact submittal procedures.

B. The Division 27 Contractor shall provide for review, without exception prior to material acquisition

and installation, the following items. Failure to submit required items shall disqualify the bidder.

1. Product Data Sheets (Catalog Cuts)

2. Backbone Diagram

3. Riser Diagram

4. Cabling Diagram

5. System Schematics

6. Signal Flow Diagram

7. Dimensioned plans, sections and elevations and fabrication details.

8. Specification Sheets for Test Equipment

9. Bill of Materials

10. Contracting Firm Qualifications and Certifications

11. Installation Team Qualifications by Individual

12. Current Manufacturer Certifications

C. Provide prior to completion:

1. Cable data base listing patch panel station cable assignments. Database shall be provided

on compact disc or other electronic media format when requested by the Construction

Manager, Wilton Community School District or the Design Team. Database shall be

submitted to the requesting party within seven (7) calendar days.

2. Cable administration drawings, as requested to assist in the planning process. Drawings will

be requested prior to final documentation.

D. Provide at completion of each construction phase area:

1. Cable test and certification reports; summary hard copy or full test results on compact disc

when requested by the owner or design team. Reports shall be submitted to the requesting

party within seven (7) calendar days.

2. One (1) set of record drawings of the actual installation of the Division 27 systems. Drawings

shall be given as full size originals and on disk in AutoCAD format

E. Provide at final completion Closeout Submittals. This shall consist of three (3) bound sets of O&M

(Operating and Maintenance) Manuals formatted as defined by Division 1 and one (1) electronic

copy provided on a CD/DVD disc. Each copy of the O&M Manual shall include, at minimum,

items listed as follows:

1. Cable test and certification reports; summary hard copy and full test results on disc. Test

results shall be delivered at the completion of each project phase and at any time when

called for by the Owner.

2. Provide one (1) full-size hard copy set of record drawings (as-builts) to be submitted to the

Design Team for approval, immediately upon completion of the installation.

3. Instruction manuals including equipment and schedules, operating instructions, and

manufacturer's instructions.

4. Manufacturer Warranty Certificate.

01/27/2020 279



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 7

a. Warranty contacts including but not limited to: names, telephone numbers (office

and mobile).

5. Networked Devices

a. Provide the owner a list of all networked devices including all IP addresses and

passwords for devices and managing software.


A. Contracting firm shall constitute a company with a minimum of five (5) years successful

installation experience with projects utilizing infrastructure and systems work similar to that

required for this project.

B. Service Qualifications: Installing and servicing contractor shall have a permanent office within a

120 mile radius of the project site.

C. Cabling Contractor shall have at least one (1) Registered Communications Distribution Designer

and installers with Installer-level BICSI Certifications on staff responsible for this project. Provide

copies of these certificates in the submittal process.

D. Work crew, not involved in installing cable elements (e.g. laborers delivering/moving materials,

installing grounding by an electrician, or workers installing pathway elements) do not require BICSI

or manufacturer certification or registration.

E. Contractor shall provide a Manufacturer Certification for the system solution bid, issued directly in

the bidder’s company name, valid for the time frame in which the installation will be completed.

Contractor shall be manufacturer certified in order to participate in the bid event.

F. The contractor shall be knowledgeable in local, state, regional, and national codes and

regulations. All work shall comply with the latest revision of codes or regulations. When conflict

exists between local or national codes or regulations, the most stringent codes or regulations shall

apply.

G. Only installers trained and certified by the proposed manufacturer shall be allowed to install

products. Installers must possess the highest level of certification available by the manufacturer

for the specific solution being installed.

H. Only installers trained and certified by the proposed manufacturer shall be allowed to install

firestop products.

I. Before bidding, the contractor shall study and compare all contract documents and promptly

notify the Design Team of any discrepancies or deficiencies discovered by or made known to the

contractor.

J. Discrepancies: Whenever a discrepancy or inconsistency exists between related information

indicated on the contract drawings and/or specifications, this contractor shall obtain additional

clarification and direction from the Design Team before proceeding. For bidding purposes, this

contractor shall include the labor and materials necessary to comply with the solution that results

in the greatest cost to the contract.

1. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, then the more stringent requirement

shall apply.

2. The failure to question any controversial item will constitute acceptance by the bidder who

shall execute it to the satisfaction of the owner after being awarded the contract.

K. Deficiencies: The contractor and associated subcontractors shall resolve all known deficiencies

and omissions, including non-compliance with applicable codes, with the Design Team prior to

ordering materials or proceeding with the work. Any work performed prior to receipt of

instructions from the Design Team will be done so at the contractor’s risk.

1. If mention has been omitted pertaining to details, items or related accessories required for

the completion of any system, it is understood such item and accessories are included in the

contract. After the contract is awarded, claims based on insufficient data or incorrectly

assumed conditions, or claims based on misunderstanding the nature of the work, will not be

recognized.

01/27/2020 280



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 8

2. All devices, symbols and work illustrated shall be new work provided under this contract

except work labeled existing to remain and equipment labeled to be furnished (or supplied)

by others, but installed by this contractor.


A. Equipment, materials, and supplies shall be shipped, handled and stored in ways that shall

prevent damage to the items.

B. All items shall be handled and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of

stored products to assure that products are maintained under manufacturer's specified

conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

D. Equipment, materials, and supplies to be incorporated in the area of work shall be new unless

otherwise specified.

E. Equipment, materials, and supplies shall be produced in a good workmanlike manner.

F. When the quality of a material, process, or article is not specifically set forth in the Drawings or

Specifications, the best available quality of the material, process, or article shall be provided.


A. Conditions and Measurements: Visit the jobsite to verify installation conditions and confirm

measurements for all required systems and associated cabling connectivity.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall submit, in the bid documents, any additional contractor-specific warranties

or guarantees to be offered on the project.

B. The Contractor shall supply any and all necessary documentation needed to process and record

the warranty(s) and to verify the installation solution.

C. Data Cabling System Warranty

1. All cabling systems shall include a minimum twenty (20) year application assurance warranty

as a manufacturer registered system installation. During the warranty period, and for non-

conformities of which contractor has notice, contractor shall take all necessary and

appropriate action; free of charge, to correct any non-conformity with the warranties

contained in the manufacturer agreement. During the warranty period, contractor shall

provide to the Owner, free of costs and charges, all support necessary to ensure that the

cabling system meets the requirements specified in this document and performance

guarantees provided by the contractors. During the warranty period, contractors shall

furnish, or cause to be furnished, all maintenance, service, parts and replacements

necessary to maintain the cabling system in good working condition, at no cost to the

Owner.

2. The contractor shall supply a full manufacturer’s application assurance warranty for all new

installations, to include approved termination hardware and cabling media from the

proposed manufacturer’s list of approved materials. Services to be provided by this

contractor to the Owner during the warranty period shall include, without limitation, the

following:

a. Remedial Maintenance

1) Contractor shall provide service on the Owner's site as necessary including, but

not limited to, fault isolation, diagnosis, and repair.

b. Maintenance Records

1) Contractor shall maintain, at the jobsite, a current record of the cabling system

configuration.

c. Replacement Parts

01/27/2020 281



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 9

1) Contractor shall provide and install replacement parts, including new

components.

D. All Other Communications Systems Warranty

1. Unless listed elsewhere within these specifications, a warranty shall be provided for a

minimum of one (1) year for all other communications systems listed. One year shall begin

from the date of Substantial Completion. This warranty shall cover both product and service

to address remedial maintenance and replacement parts as is appropriate to keep each

system complete and fully functional.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. If a Bidder proposes to Substitute an article, device, material, equipment, form of construction,

fixture, or item other than the approved manufacturers and part numbers, listed and named in

the Specifications, the Bidder shall certify that the proposed item is equal in quality and all

aspects of performance and appearance, to the items specified. The Bidder shall submit a

request for Substitution to the Design Team by following the instruction in Specification Section 01

6000, which must include:

1. The name and complete description of the proposed Substitution including Drawings,

performance and test data, and other information necessary for a complete evaluation;

and

2. A statement setting forth any changes that the Proposed Substitution will require in the

Contract Documents or the project.

B. If the Design Team approves the Proposed Substitution, the Design Team shall issue an

Addendum. If the Design Team does not approve the substitution, the Design Team shall inform

the Bidder of its decision, which is final. The Design Team may reject a proposed Substitution

because the Bidder failed to provide sufficient information to enable the Design Team to

completely evaluate the Proposed Substitution without causing a delay in the scheduled bid

opening.

1. Proposed Substitutions received by the Design Team after the allotted time allowed by

Section 01 6000 shall not be considered.

C. Bidder shall confirm all reference part numbers, listed within Division 27, as current and suitable for

the items described and specified and shall file a formal RFI for all perceived discrepancies prior

to bidding.

1. All materials associated with reference parts shall be included so as to constitute a

complete and functional system, whether or not specifically identified and itemized.

2.2 ASSEMBLIES

A. Sleeves and Pathways for Cabling:

1. Where additional conduits are needed beyond those shown on the drawings to

accommodate the installation of systems cabling, this contractor (Division 27) shall include

such provisions in this contract. Provide conduit suitable for its application and sized in

accordance with industry standards. Include nylon bushings at conduit ends and

firestopping as required around conduits wherever building barriers are penetrated. If

necessary, this contractor shall hire a qualified contractor to perform this work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING

A. Division 27 Contractor shall thoroughly clean all assemblies within the telecommunications room’s

space before they are turned over to the Wilton Community School District IT Services for

operation. Cleaning shall include, but not be limited to, all ladder tray, racks and wire managers

(both inside and out), copper and optical fiber panels (both inside and out). Should any

01/27/2020 282



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270000 - 10

telecommunications room or closet be completed prior to the balance of the floor space

construction that it serves, racks, cabinets, and wall frames shall be covered with plastic sheeting

to repel dust and other contaminants to which they will be subjected.


A. The Owner shall not be responsible for delays in work because of shutdowns due to unsafe

working practices by Contractors.

B. The active information transport system and cabling associated with specific work beyond the

construction area shall not be disrupted at any time.

C. Contractor shall clean work areas each day and remove debris properly and legally from the

project site. Materials and supplies stored for use in the project shall be neatly stacked outside the

circulation areas. All exits and paths shall be cleaned so as to prevent dirt from being tracked

into the site.

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure any parking permits prior to the first day of

work on-site.

E. Work outside of normal operating hours and days shall be coordinated with Wilton Community

School District.

3.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. All contract work shall be performed in accordance with the policies, procedures, and standards

established by the Owner.

B. In construction areas, all Contractor personnel shall wear personnel protection devices, as

deemed appropriate by the Construction Manager and as required by OSHA for the work

location and work operation being performed. Devices shall include, but not be limited to

hardhats, work boots, safety eye protection, reflective vests, etc.

C. All exposed holes, pits, pipes, etc., either inside or outside the project site, shall be barricaded or

plated and adequately secured when Contractor personnel are not present. All ladders, hanging

wires, pipes, and other items protruding at a pedestrian level travel way most be removed or

secured following the final shift of the day.

D. During breaks or when only a portion of work has been completed, tools shall not be left exposed

where others may risk injury or attempt to use them. Windows and doors shall not be left

unsecured or propped open during breaks. At the completion of the final shift each day, doors,

windows, or other openings shall be adequately secured.

E. When driving on the Owner's property, Contractor personnel shall observe all traffic safety

regulations and pay particular attention to pedestrians. All loose material and debris on vehicles

shall be adequately secured and tied down.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 283



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 270505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270505 - 1

ASECTION 270505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

B. Demolition, temporary removal, relocation, or reconfiguration of selected site elements and/or

Information Technology (IT), Security or other Special Systems or infrastructure.

C. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

D. Contractor shall include in the Bid all labor, materials, tools, transportation, storage costs,

equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, inspections, taxes and all necessary and

related items required to provide complete demolition and cutover of existing

telecommunication systems shown and described in the drawings and specifications herein.

E. The Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating phased activities and construction

methods that minimize disruption to operations and provide complete and operational systems.

Equipment and devices shall not be removed or reconfigured until removal or reconfiguration

has been coordinated with owner and approval is given in writing.

F. The Contractor shall coordinate interfaces to existing systems that are being demolished in order

to minimize disruption to the existing systems operations. Any systems outages shall be approved

in advance and scheduled with Wilton Community School District .





section:

1. Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS


A. Reference Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1.4 DEFINITIONS



A. Comply with Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS


A. Pre-Demolition Meeting

1. Conduct a pre-demolition meeting at Project Site with Wilton Community School District and

all affected stakeholders.

a. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

b. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

c. Existing telecommunications rooms that have demolition work may involve electrical,

mechanical and architectural demolition. Review and coordinate requirements of

work performed by other trades.

d. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

01/27/2020 284



WILTON, IOWA



e. Review procedures to be followed when critical systems are inadvertently interrupted.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required with Wilton

Community School District prior to device removal to ensure systems that must remain

operational are not compromised during the demolition process.




A. The owner WILL occupy portions of building during selective demolition.

B. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

C. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far

as practical.

D. Field verify the existing conditions, device equipment locations to determine the extent of the

demolition required. Notify the Design Team of discrepancies between existing conditions and

Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. Proceeding with demolition indicates and

acceptance of existing conditions by the contractor.

E. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify the

Design Team. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against

damage during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Demolition and construction methods shall conform to Wilton Community School District

requirements and all applicable building codes.

B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped per approved procedures before

starting selective demolition operations.

C. Survey existing condition of all communications systems related conduits and cables from origin

to destination and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective

demolition required.

D. Label all conduits and cables with origin, destination and what system they serve.

E. Consult with the Owner to determine whether systems can be disabled or whether a new parallel

system needs to be installed.

F. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to the Design Team.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Comply with requirements for access and protection.

01/27/2020 285



WILTON, IOWA



C. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

D. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to

and from occupied portions of building.

E. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing

construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage

to structure and interior areas.

F. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed

during selective demolition operations.

G. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

H. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and

as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing

regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically. Complete selective demolition operations

above each floor or tier, before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level, if

applicable. Remove all abandoned cable from origin to destination.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting

methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand

tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to

minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed

spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden spaces,

such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before

starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and/or portable fire-suppression

devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free

fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's designated storage area. Coordinate delivery of equipment with

the Owner seven (7) days prior to delivery.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.


01/27/2020 286



WILTON, IOWA



4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials

and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to

make item functional for use indicated.

5. Perform testing on reinstalled active systems and get sign-off by a the Owner or Owner’s

representative inspector that systems are re-connected and working properly.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.4 UTILITY SERVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect

them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions.

2. For existing equipment with active components in them, provide dust protection and

circulate cooling air with a portable air conditioning unit or other means to ensure

equipment does not overheat.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, or Relocated: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or

cap off indicated utility services and communications systems serving areas to be selectively

demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

Coordinate the disconnection of all electrical circuits with the Electrical Contractor prior to

disconnection.

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site

and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate onsite.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.

B. The contractor shall be required, on a daily basis, to dispose of any demolished material not

required to be returned to the Owner. All materials shall be transported off of the Owner’s

property at the expense of the Contractor.

C. At the end of each work day or shift, the Contractor shall be required to clean-up the work area

and remove all construction debris such that the site is clean and usable without hazard to

workers.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 287



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

270526 - 1

SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Provide a communications bonding and grounding system as described herein and in

compliance with the referenced codes and standards.

B. The grounding and bonding for communications systems shall consist of the following

components:

1. Grounding Conductors.

2. Grounding Connectors.

3. Grounding Busbars.

4. Grounding Labeling.

C. These components, upon completion of installation and testing, shall provide the means of a low

impedance pathway to earth for unintentional and/or stray voltages or spurious signals present

on telecommunications media and equipment.





section:

1. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems



4. Section 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS


CABLING

6. Section 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES




1.4 DEFINITIONS




1.6 SUBMITTALS






01/27/2020 288



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270526 - 2

1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Panduit

B. Burndy, LLC

C. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

D. Substitution: See Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation,

insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

1. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB):

a. Size this conductor as a minimum 6 AWG minimum, then as 2,000 cmil per linear foot

up to 3/0 AWG.

2. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT):

a. Conductor sizing shall be equal in size to the largest telecommunications bonding

backbone (TBB) conductor.

3. Grounding Equalizer (GE):


up to 3/0 AWG.

4. Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TBC):


up to 3/0 AWG.

2.3 GROUNDING CONNECTORS

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for

specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with

UL 486A-486B.

B. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor

when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

2. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type, mechanical connector;

with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch (15.8- or 25.4- mm) centers for a

two-bolt connection to the busbar.

3. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS

A. Telecommunications Ground Busbar (TGB): Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid

copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 50 mm) in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The

busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply

with TIA-607-C.

1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch (50-mm) clearance to

access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.

3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V

switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

01/27/2020 289



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270526 - 3

B. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting

conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and

complying with TIA-607-C. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

1. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inches (1827 or 914 mm) long, with stainless- steel or

copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.

2.5 GROUNDING LABELING

A. Comply with requirements for identification products in Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with

requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance

of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Inspect the test results of the AC grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work.

C. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after any unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance,

and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that

each element is connected to at least two others.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with TIA-607-C.

D. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6

AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall

not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.

E. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2 AWG

minimum.

F. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

G. Conductor Support:

1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches (900 mm).

H. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:

1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,

and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the

diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices.

3. Support at not more than 36-inch (900-mm) intervals.

01/27/2020 290



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270526 - 4

4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch (21-mm) PVC conduit until conduit

enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway

through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise

indicated.

a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond

the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with

requirements in Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS, and

bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.

I. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar:

1. Locate the TGB inside each floor serving telecommunications space and provide the

following connections:

a. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB).

b. Building steel, via telecommunications bonding conductors (TBC).

c. Each entrance conduit into the space, via telecommunications bonding conductors

(TBC).

d. Overhead cable support within the space via telecommunications bonding

conductors (TBC).

e. Dedicated power panel’s within the space serving communication equipment, via

telecommunications bonding conductors (TBC).

f. Metallic pathways (conduits, surface raceway, etc.) within the space, via

telecommunications bonding conductors (TBC).

3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. The bonding conductor for telecommunications (BCT) between the telecommunications main

grounding busbar (TMGB) and the main building AC service equipment ground shall not be

smaller than the largest telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) conductor.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in

that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector.

2. Pretwist the conductor.

3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.

E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications bonding

backbone conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the

grounding equalizer conductor. The telecommunications bonding backbone conductor and

grounding equalizer conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot (1 sq. mm/linear

meter) of conductor length, up to a maximum size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.

F. Telecommunications Racks: Bond metallic components of the rack to the telecommunications

bonding and grounding system. Install vertically-mounted rack grounding busbar unless the rack

is manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG

bonding conductors.

G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the

room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.

H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications

equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the

panelboard.

01/27/2020 291



WILTON, IOWA



SYSTEMS

270526 - 5

I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and

spaces. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2 when grounding shielded balanced twisted-

pair cables.

J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or

rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding

conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a

supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the

space containing the TMGB.

2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space

containing the TGB.

3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point:

"WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR

DISCONNECT!"


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical

connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester,

taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room

containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM.

Conduct tests with the facility in operation.

a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding

electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms.

1) Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-

scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an

accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent.

2) With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system

electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to

the TMGB . Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.

3. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify

Design Team promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

4. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 292



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 1

SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Conduit and fittings.

B. Hooks.

C. Junction Boxes

D. Devices Boxes





section:

1. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems





1.4 DEFINITIONS




1.6 SUBMITTALS






PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit

2. Western Tube & Conduit Corp.

3. Wheatland Tube Company

4. Substitutions: See Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

B. Conduit types:

1. EMT shall be steel, hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized, with an inner coating to

protect cables and aid pulling, UL listed, and meeting the requirements of UL 797 and ANSI

C80.3.

01/27/2020 293



WILTON, IOWA



2. RMC shall be steel, hot-dipped galvanized inside and outside with factory threaded ends full

cut and galvanized after threading, UL listed, and meeting the requirements of UL 6 and

ANSI C80.1.

3. RNC shall be PVC Schedule 40 rigid plastic unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, shall be

rated for use with 90 degree C wire, and shall conform to UL 651, WC-1094C and NEMA TC2.

4. Flexible (flex) conduit: Flex conduit is not approved and not acceptable. Where, in rare

instances, flex conduit is the only remaining viable option, the Contractor shall notify the

Engineer and await the Engineer's direction prior to procurement and installation.

5. Conduit bodies (LB's): Conduit bodies (LB's) are not approved and are not acceptable.

C. Fittings:

1. Provide fittings as follows:

a. EMT fittings shall be steel compression type with a nylon insulated throat for rain-tight

and concrete-tight applications, steel set screw type or steel compression type for all

other connections. Conduit ends shall be fitted with bushings - bushings shall be

threaded type for RMC and IMC, set screw type for EMT, and have a nylon insulated

throat.

b. RMC fittings shall be threaded galvanized steel. Conduit ends shall be fitted with

bushings - shall be threaded and have a nylon insulated throat.

c. RNC fittings shall be of same material and manufacturer as the conduit and shall be

UL listed and conform to UL 514.

2. Expansion fittings shall be provided across structural joints, shall be of a design to

compensate for expansion and contraction, and shall be sealed to prevent entrance of

water and moisture, and shall safely deflect and expand up to twice the distance of the

structural movement. Expansion fittings shall be approved for grounding duty.

3. Minimum Trade Size:

a. Communication systems conduit: 1 inch.

b. Audio Visual systems conduit: 1-1/2 inch.

D. Joint Compound for EMT, RMC, or RNC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having

jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect

threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 HOOKS


1. Caddy/Erico

2. Cooper B-Line

3. Thomas & Betts


B. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable.

C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and

application.

D. Comply with TIA-569-D.

E. Galvanized steel.

F. J shape.

2.3 JUNCTION BOXES


1. Hubbell/Raco

2. Garvin Industries


01/27/2020 294



WILTON, IOWA



B. Junction boxes shall be provided to serve as a transition point between pathways/raceways.

Junction boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab

connections), with knockouts for conduit entrances, meeting NEMA OS 1.

C. Junction boxes shall not be placed in non-accessible ceiling locations unless specifically shown

on the Communications Construction Drawings or approved in writing by the Engineer prior to

rough-in and installation.

D. Junction boxes in locations other than walls shall be sized according to the NEC.

E. Junction boxes in walls:

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, junction boxes shall be 4-11/16 inch by 4-11/16 inch

by 2-1/8 inch deep with blank cover, and knockouts pre-manufactured to support the

conduit size serving the junction box.

2. Size according to the NEC and provide the larger of the minimum size mentioned above or

the NEC requirements.

2.4 DEVICE BOXES


1. Hubbell/Raco

2. Garvin Industries


B. Device boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab

connections), with knockouts for conduit entrances, meeting NEMA OS 1, and equipped with

extension rings to suit construction and application

C. Device Box Types:

1. Device Box: Typically installed as an empty box with faceplate, conduit and pull string for

future use, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Communications Construction

Drawings.

a. Shall be a minimum 4-11/16 inch by 4-11/16 inch by 3-1/4 inch deep capable of

accepting a minimum of (2) 1-1/4 inch conduits with a maximum size of 1-1/2 inch.

Equal to RACO 260.

b. Shall be equipped with a minimum single-gang mud ring unless otherwise noted on

the Drawings.

c. Provide a blank faceplate to match the material, style and color being used on the

Electrical Wiring Devices

2. Outlet Box: Outlet boxes shall be provided to house Communications System outlets and

connectors. Unless otherwise noted in the Communications Construction Drawings the

typical Outlet Box(es) shall be as follows:

a. Shall be a minimum 4-11/16 inch by 4-11/16 inch by 3-1/4 inch deep capable of

accepting a minimum of (2) 1-1/4 inch conduits with a maximum size of 1-1/2 inch.

Equal to RACO 260.

b. Shall be equipped with a minimum single-gang mud ring unless otherwise noted on

the Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

01/27/2020 295



WILTON, IOWA



1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

d. Gymnasiums

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT, RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, or

innerduct.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air:

Plenum-type, communications cable pathway.

7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts:Riser-type

optical fiber cable

8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications

Cable: General-use, optical fiber cable pathway.

9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel units in

institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 1 inch trade size for communications cables .

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of

conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits

and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and

number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use set-screw, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements on

Drawings or in this Section are stricter:

1. NECA 1.

2. NECA/BICSI 568.

3. TIA-569-D.

4. NECA 101

5. NECA 102.

6. NECA 105.

7. NECA 111.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials

and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PATHWAYS AND CABLING.

E. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

01/27/2020 296



WILTON, IOWA



F. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

H. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within

12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

I. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install

conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

J. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

K. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in

an enclosure.

L. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed

compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

O. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus one additional quarter-turn.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll

cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less

than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Secure pull

wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside pathways in

use.

S. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

V. Hooks:

1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity

limits.

2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or

support rods.

3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables shall

be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings, luminaires,

power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical and

communications equipment.

01/27/2020 297



WILTON, IOWA



4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c.

5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.

W. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually

indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box

unless otherwise indicated.

X. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Y. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

AB. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AC. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

AND CABLING.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 298



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PATHWAYS AND CABLING

270544 - 1

SECTION 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sleeves.

B. Firestop Sealants.

C. Firestop Putty.





section:







A. Reference Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.4 DEFINITIONS



A. Comply with Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.6 SUBMITTALS






1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Use only fire-stopping products that have been tested for specific fire resistance rated

construction conditions confirming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular

space requirements, and fire rating involved for each separate instance.

01/27/2020 299



WILTON, IOWA




270544 - 2

2.2 SLEEVES


1. Specified Technologies, Inc. - EZ-Path

2. Hilti - Speed Sleeve


B. Wall and Floor Sleeves:

1. Fire-rated pathway devices shall be the preferred product and shall be installed in all

locations where frequent cable moves, add-ons and changes will occur, such devices shall:

a. Meet the hourly rating of the floor or wall penetrated.

b. Permit the allowable cable load to range from 0% to 100% visual fill thereby

eliminating the need to calculate allowable fill ratios.

c. Not require any additional action on the part of the installer to open or close the

pathway device or activate the internal smoke and fire seal, such as, but not limited

to:

1) Opening or closing of doors.

2) Twisting an inner liner.

3) Removal or replacement of any material such as, but not limited to, sealant,

caulk, putty, pillows, bags, foam plugs, foam blocks, or any other material.

d. Permit multiple devices to be ganged together to increase overall cable capacity.

e. Allow for retrofit to install around existing cables.

f. Include an optional means to lengthen the device to facilitate installation in thicker

barriers without degrading fire or smoke sealing properties or inhibiting ability of

device to permit cable moves, add-ons, or changes.

2. Where single cables penetrate gypsum board/stud wall assemblies, a fire-rated cable

grommet may be substituted. Acceptable products shall be molded from plenum-grade

polymer and conform to the outer diameter of the cable forming a tight seal for fire and

smoke. Additionally, acceptable products shall lock into the barrier to secure cable

penetration.

3. Where non-mechanical products are utilized, provide products that upon curing do not re-

emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to

atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture

characteristic during or after construction.

4. Where it is not practical to use a mechanical device, openings within floors and walls

designed to accommodate telecommunications and data cabling shall be provided with

re-enterable products that do not cure or dry.

5. Cable trays shall terminate at each barrier and resume on the opposite side such that

cables pass independently through fire-rated pathway devices. Cable tray shall be rigidly

supported independent from fire-rated pathway devices on each side of barrier.

6. Treat all wall penetrations that are required as a minimum of one a 1-hour rated wall. It shall

also be assumed that any existing penetration used by a contractor for cabling is “owned”

by that contractor. They shall be responsible for providing the appropriate fire-stopping

materials to fire-stop the penetration regardless of whether fire-stopping existed at the

beginning. Any fire-stopping material removed during cable installation shall be replaced

with like material.

2.3 FIRESTOP SEALANTS


following:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. - SpecSeal Series SSS Sealant

2. Specified Technologies, Inc. - SpecSeal Series LCI Sealant


01/27/2020 300



WILTON, IOWA




270544 - 3

B. Firestop Sealants: This shall be a single component latex formula that upon curing shall not re-

emulsify during exposure to moisture. Firestop sealants shall be used to fill annular space around

and between the wall substrate and sleeve.

2.4 FIRESTOP PUTTY


following:

1. Specified Technologies, Inc. - SpecSeal SSP Putty


B. Firestop Putty: This shall be intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putty containing no

solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds.

C. Firestop Putty shall be used to seal through-penetrations such as traditional conduit sleeves.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMNICATION SYSTEMS PENETRATIONS


B. Sleeves for Penetrating Above-Grade Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway, using fire-stop sealant appropriate

for size, depth, and location of joint.

2. Use the fire-rated prefabricated sleeve assembly as specified unless penetration

arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Rectangular openings shall require

firestop pillows to block the annular space of a fire-rated wall.

3. Install sleeves for wall penetrations. Perform core drilling as required to install/set the

prefabricated assembly into its designated location.

4. Install sleeves during erection of walls.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors a minimum of 2 inches

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use the fire-rated prefabricated sleeve assembly as specified unless penetration

arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. If conduit was utilized, seal space outside of sleeves with approved firestop

compound/sealant for gypsum board assemblies.

D. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-

type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

E. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

F. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to

allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-

seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install through-penetration fire-stop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Seal all openings or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.

2. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to

installation of through-penetration firestop systems that might hamper the performance of

fire dampers as it pertains to duct work.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

01/27/2020 301



WILTON, IOWA




270544 - 4

4. Apply a suitable bond-breaker to prevent three-sided adhesion in applications where this

condition might occur such as the intersection of a gypsum wallboard/steel stud wall to floor

or roof assembly where the joint is backed by a steel ceiling runner or track.

B. Perimeter Containment: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of perimeter fire

containment system products.

1. Seal all slab-edge openings to ensure an air and water resistant seal.

2. Curtain wall insulation that is an integral component of the perimeter fire containment

system shall be in accordance with the conditions of testing and classification as specified in

the design and shall comply with thermal insulation requirements as specified in Section 07

210 Building Insulation.

C. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or

cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. A firestop identification label shall be applied to the wall substrate adjacent to the through

penetration or joint firestop system.

C. At a minimum, the label shall contain the following information:

1. Firestop identification per Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

2. Fire stop product/system used

3. Installation Company

4. Penetration Hour Rating

5. Installation Date


A. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or firestopping products so they comply with requirements.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and

soiling as work progresses.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 302



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270553 - 1

SECTION 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Color and legend requirements for labels and signs.

B. Labels.

C. Bands and tubes.

D. Signs.





section:







1.4 DEFINITIONS




1.6 SUBMITTALS






PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 70 and TIA 606-B.

B. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

C. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used

by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification Labels:

01/27/2020 303



WILTON, IOWA



1. Black letters on a white field.

2.3 LABELS

A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and

chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label

ends.

B. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, polyester flexible labels with acrylic

pressure-sensitive adhesive.

1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating protective

shields over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed

legend.

C. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-

resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location.

1. Minimum Nominal Size:

a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches for raceway and conductors.

b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment.

c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 BANDS AND TUBES

A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2

inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceway or cable they identify, that stay in

place by gripping action.

2.5 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.

B. Laminated-Acrylic or Melamine-Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend.

2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick.

c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for

mounting.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying communications identification products,

clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods

recommended by manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

01/27/2020 304



WILTON, IOWA



B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation

and maintenance manual.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance

of communications systems and connected items.

G. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing

from the floor.

H. Polyester Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear tape, with adhesive appropriate to

the location and substrate.

3. Provide label 6 inches from cable end.

I. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels:

1. Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

2. Provide label 6 inches from cable end.

J. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams,

schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-

inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to

provide view of identifying devices.

B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points,

and locations with high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.

C. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify covers of each junction and

pull box with self-adhesive labels containing wiring system legend.

1. System legends shall be as follows:

a. Telecommunications.

b. Audio Visual.

c. Public Address.

D. Faceplates: Label individual faceplates with self-adhesive labels. Place label at top of faceplate.

Each faceplate shall be labeled with its individual, sequential designation, composed of the

following, in the order listed:

1. Wiring closet designation.

2. Dash.

3. Work area outlet number.

E. Equipment Room Labeling:

1. Racks, Frames, and Enclosures: Identify front and rear of each with self-adhesive labels

containing equipment designation.

2. Patch Panels: Label individual rows in each rack, starting at top and working down, with self-

adhesive labels.

3. Data Outlets: Label each outlet with a self-adhesive label using the same scheme defined

under Faceplates.

01/27/2020 305



WILTON, IOWA



F. Backbone Cables: Label each cable with a polyester self-adhesive wraparound label indicating

the location of the far or other end of the backbone cable. Patch panel or punch down block

where cable is terminated should be labeled identically.

G. Horizontal Cables: Label each cable with a polyester self-adhesive wraparound label indicating

the following, in the order listed:

1. Room number.

2. Colon.

3. Faceplate number.

H. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures: Baked-enamel warning signs or metal-

backed butyrate.

1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

J. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Indoor Equipment: Baked-enamel signs, Metal-backed butyrate, laminated-acrylic or

melamine-plastic sign.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Communications racks/cabinets.

b. Uninterruptible power supplies.

c. Power distribution components.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 306



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES 271116 - 1

SECTION 271116 - COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backboards.

2. 19-inch freestanding equipment cabinets.

3. Power strips.

4. Grounding and bonding.

5. Labeling.





section:








1.4 DEFINITIONS




1.6 SUBMITTALS






1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. UL listed.

B. RoHS compliant.

01/27/2020 307



WILTON, IOWA



2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches.

B. Backboard Paint: White, fire-retardant paint. Apply two coats to both sides and all edges. Leave

any fire-retardant plywood stamp exposed for inspection purposes.

2.3 19-INCH FREESTANDING EQUIPMENT CABINETS


1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

2. Panduit

3. Ortronics


B. Description: Manufacturer-assembled four-post frame enclosed by side and top panels and front

and rear doors, designed for mounting telecommunications equipment. Width is compatible with

EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch equipment mounting with an opening of 17.72 inches between rails.

C. General Cabinet Requirements:

1. Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with

dimensions of units to be supported.

2. Material: Extruded steel.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

4. Color: Black.

D. Modular Freestanding Cabinets:

1. Overall Height: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Overall Depth: 23 inches.

3. Load Rating: 3000 lbs.

4. Number of Rack Units: As indicated on Drawings.

a. Numbering: Every rack unit, on interior of rack.

5. Threads: 10-32

6. Removable and lockable side and top panels.

7. Hinged and lockable front and rear doors.

8. Adjustable feet for leveling.

9. Screened ventilation openings in roof and rear door.

10. Cable access provisions in roof and base.

11. TGB.

12. Rack-mounted, 550-cfm fan with filter.

13. Power strip.

14. All cabinets keyed alike.

E. Cable Management:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.

4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at top of each relay rack, with a minimum

height of two rack units each.

2.4 POWER STRIPS


1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

2. Panduit

3. Ortronics


B. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.

01/27/2020 308



WILTON, IOWA



1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.

2. Rack mounting.

3. Twelve (12) 20-A, 120 VAC, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R receptacles.

4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.

6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: When protection is lost, circuit opens and cannot be

reset.

7. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost.

8. Cord connected with 15-foot line cord.

9. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.

10. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 33 kA per phase.

11. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449

clamping voltage for all three modes shall be not more than 330 V.

2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Rack and Cabinet TGBs: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors

ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with

TIA-606-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

1. Rack-Mounted Vertical TGB: 72 or 36 inches (1828.8 or 914.4 mm) long, with stainless-steel or

copper-plated hardware for attachment to rack.

2.6 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,

laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout of communications equipment spaces.

C. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM for installation of communications equipment spaces.

D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

E. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in racks and room. Coordinate

service entrance configuration with service provider.

1. Meet jointly with system providers, equipment suppliers, and Owner to exchange information

and agree on details of equipment configurations and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.

3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels

in equipment spaces to accommodate and optimize configuration and space requirements

of telecommunications equipment.

4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects,

and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and

security, and related systems that share space in equipment room.

F. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications

equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

01/27/2020 309



WILTON, IOWA



3.2 GROUNDING

A. Comply with NECA/BICSI 607.

B. Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Bonding, Grounding (Earthing) and Electrical

Protection" Ch.

C. Locate TGB to minimize length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least 2 inches

of clearance behind TGB. Connect TGB with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode

conductor from TGB to suitable electrical building ground. Connect rack TGB to near TGB or the

TMGB.

1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to patch panel, and bond patch panel to TGB or TMGB.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Coordinate system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with

requirements in Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 2 level of

administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Labels shall be machine printed. Type shall be 1/4 inch in height.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 310



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 271300 - 1

SECTION 271300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Single Mode Fiber Backbone Cabling

2. Optical fiber cable hardware.

3. Grounding and bonding.

4. Labeling.

B. Description:

1. The fiber backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between

communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the

telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables,

intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or

jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection.

2. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or

at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of the backbone

cabling system, all new backbone cabling shall be continuous and without splice as

illustrated and described in the Drawings.





section:



3. Section 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

4. Section 270543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS


CABLING




1.4 DEFINITIONS




1.6 SUBMITTALS




01/27/2020 311



WILTON, IOWA





1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE MODE FIBER CABLING

A. General Cable Characteristics:

1. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Corning

2. Substitutions: See Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS.

C. Standards:

1. Comply with ICEA S-104-696 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA-492CAA for detailed specifications.

D. Conductive cable shall be interlocking armored type.

E. Armored cable shall be interlocking armored type.

F. Jacket:

1. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-D.

2. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to

exceed 40 inches.

G. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL

444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

1. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP complying with NFPA 262.

H. 9/125 Micrometer, Singlemode, Inside Plant Optical Fiber Cable (OS1)

1. Description: Single mode, 9/125-micrometer, 12-strand fiber, tight buffered, armored optical

fiber cable.

2. Maximum Attenuation: 1.0 dB/km at 1310nm; 1.0 dB/km at 1550nm.

3. Jacket color: Yellow

2.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


1. Matched Solution by the Cabling Manufacturer - Corning (Basis of Design)

2. Substitutions : See Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

B. Standards:

1. Comply with Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) specifications of the

TIA-604 series

2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.

01/27/2020 312



WILTON, IOWA



C. Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus

spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

E. Connector Type: Type LC complying with TIA-604-10-B.

F. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:

1. Male: color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a

single optical fiber cable.

2. Insertion loss not more than 0.25 dB

3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.

G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:

1. Female; quick-connect, simplex and duplex; fixed telecommunications connector designed

for termination of a single optical fiber cable.

2. Insertion loss not more than 0.25 dB.


4. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.




B. Comply with TIA-607-B.

C. Comply with TIA-607-C.

2.4 LABELING




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by

communications service provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays, except within consoles, cabinets,

desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, attics, and gypsum board partitions

where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables, except in

unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528 - PATHWAYS

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where

possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal

points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide

and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install cables parallel with or at right angles to sides

and back of enclosure.

01/27/2020 313



WILTON, IOWA



3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Comply with requirements for cabinets, and racks specified in Section 271116 -

COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES.

B. Comply with Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

D. Comply with NFPA 70 for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull

points.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood

is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around

perimeter walls of the room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to a backboard when entering room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96 inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and

form smooth gap-free corners and slots.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLES

A. Comply with NECA1, NECA 301, and NECA/BICKSI 568.

B. General Requirements for Optical Fiber Cabling Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch.6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Terminate all cables; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only

at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and

terminals.

5. Install lacing bares to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

6. Bundle, lace, and train cable to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations

on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, "Cabling Termination

Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during

installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before unreeling. heat lamps

shall not be used for heating.

9. In the communications equipment room, provide a 10-foot long service loop on each end

of cable.

10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

11. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

C. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

01/27/2020 314



WILTON, IOWA



3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods

Manual."

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in

BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."

B. Comply with TIA-607-B, TIA-607-C and NECA/BICSI-607.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing

at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to

suitable electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1. Administration Class: 1.

2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 2 level of

administration.

C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid

frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for

Project.

D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone

pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions,

horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways,

and equipment grounding conductors.

E. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is

accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the

device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within

panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals

not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m).

4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each

cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted

device, with the name and number of a particular device.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each

connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware. Where

similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a

different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

01/27/2020 315



WILTON, IOWA



F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that

contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

2. Test fiber optic cabling for bends, microfractures and breaks. Provide signal strength testing

to ensure an appropriate fiber budget is provided. Test cables after termination but not

cross-connection.

E. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a

summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution

Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files,

printed, and submitted.

F. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements.

G. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 316



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1

SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Category Cabling

B. Twisted Pair Cable Hardware

C. Grounding and Bonding

D. Labeling

1.2 DESCRIPTION:

A. Horizontal cable cabling system shall provide interconnections between the floor distributor and

the equipment outlet, otherwise known as "Cabling Subsystem," in the telecommunications

cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of horizontal cables, intermediate and main

cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for horizontal-to-

horizontal cross-connection.

1. TIA-568-C.1 requires that a minimum of two equipment outlets be installed for each work

area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point

between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications equipment outlet.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the

equipment outlets to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal Category cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum

allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the

workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.





section:






1.5 DEFINITIONS




1.7 SUBMITTALS


01/27/2020 317



WILTON, IOWA







1.10 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CATEGORY CABLING

A. General Cable Characteristics:

1. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

2. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.

3. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-C.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or Type CMP in

listed plenum communications raceway or Type CMP in listed cable routing assembly.

5. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

6. RoHS compliant.

B. Category 6a Twisted Pair Cable

1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Commscope Systimax (Basis of Design)

b. Substitutions: See Section 270000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS

2. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission

characteristics of Category 6a cable at frequencies up to 500MHz.

3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6a cables.

4. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.

5. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).

6. Cable Rating: Plenum.

7. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission

characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.

8. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6 cables.

9. Jacket: Blue thermoplastic.

2.2 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE

A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper

communications cable.

B. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware:

1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6a.

2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools.

3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from same manufacturer as twisted pair

cable, from single source.

01/27/2020 318



WILTON, IOWA



D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and

permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each

jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Features:

a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels.

b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors.

c. Replaceable connectors.

d. 24 or 48 ports.

2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch (483 mm) equipment racks.

3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair cable indicated, plus spares and blank

positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

F. Plugs and Plug Assemblies:

1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for

termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.

2. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2.


G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies:

1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for

termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable.

2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate.

3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2.


H. Faceplate:

1. Four-port, vertical single gang faceplates designed to mount to single gang wall boxes.

2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Section 262726 - WIRING

DEVICES."

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber,

and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

I. Legend:

1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.




B. Comply with TIA-607-C.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays, except within consoles, cabinets,

desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, attics, and gypsum board partitions

01/27/2020 319



WILTON, IOWA



where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables, except in

unfinished spaces.


2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528 - PATHWAYS



possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal

points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide

and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to

sides and back of enclosure.


A. Comply with Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. Comply with Section 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF TWISTED-PAIR CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA/BICSI 568.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2.

2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM), Ch.

5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section.

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to

maintain cable geometry.

5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

6. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to equipment outlets:

a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or

for direct connection to workstation equipment.

b. Locate consolidation points for twisted-pair cables at least 49 feet from

communications equipment room.

7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and

terminals.

8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending

cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI Information Transport

Systems Installation Methods Manual , Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable

Termination Practices" Section. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.



installation, and replace it with new cable.

11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before unreeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used for heating.

12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- long service loop on each end of

cable.

13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual,

Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Pulling and Installing Cable" Section. Monitor

cable pull tensions.

01/27/2020 320



WILTON, IOWA



C. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend twisted pair cabling, not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above

ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods

Manual" and TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper communication cable from

potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways, power lines,

and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as

follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA

or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods

Manual."

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in

BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."

B. Comply with TIA-607-B and NECA/BICSI-607.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing

at least a 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar

to suitable electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode

conductor.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor.

01/27/2020 321



WILTON, IOWA



3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications

Systems."

1. Administration Class: Class 1.

2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 1 level of

administration.

C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid

frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for

Project.

D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, terminal

hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions,

grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

E. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the

device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within

panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals

not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each

cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted

device, with the name and number of a particular device.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each

connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware. Where

similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a

different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that

contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.





C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Tests and Inspections:

a. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling

terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding

for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-

C.1.

b. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,

equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

01/27/2020 322



WILTON, IOWA



c. Test twisted pair cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks.

Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

1) Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test

Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy

specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords

and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel

or link test configuration.

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a

summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution

Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files,

printed, and submitted.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements.

F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G.END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 323



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 274100 - AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS 274100 - 1

SECTION 274100 - AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the

provision of audio-visual raceways, cable and related work indicated on the communications

drawings, details and specified in this Section.

B. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Provision of audio visual system equipment, back boxes, faceplates, conduit, stub ups, and

as indicated on the communications drawings.

2. Supply and installation of all cable to be provided.

3. Provision of Shop Drawings and samples as required herein.

4. Verification of dimensions and conditions at job site prior to equipment installation and

coordination with associated trades.

5. Field coordination at job site.

6. As-Built record drawings.

7. Owner Training

C. Any additional materials or services needed in order to meet the general requirements stated

above, even if not specifically mentioned herein or on the drawings, shall be provided by the

Contractor without claim for additional payment. If the drawing and specifications conflict in any

regard, the specifications or drawings that illustrate the highest value of material and/or labor

shall take precedence.

D. Related Work: The following related items are specified in other Sections of the Specifications:

E. General provisions for Electrical work - Applicable sections of Division 26.





section:





1.4 DEFINITIONS




1.6 SUBMITTALS




01/27/2020 324



WILTON, IOWA





1.9 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All raceways and related equipment shall be provided as per applicable sections of Division 26,

the Drawings and in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

B. All conduits shall be concealed.

C. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufactures recommendations.

D. All materials and components shall be new and of manufacturer's finest quality as appropriate to

the application. Uniform materials and components shall be used throughout, and wherever

possible, shall be field replaceable and commonly available.

E. All materials shall conform to applicable UL standards and to general electrical requirements.

F. See applicable sections of Division 26 for more information.

G. Audio Visual Cabling:

1. Cable required for interconnection between system equipment shall be provided for a

complete and operating system.

2. This Contractor shall verify appropriateness of system cable and quantity indicated on the

drawings prior to installation of equipment and receptacle plates.

3. All portable cable, connectors for cable provided by others and required adapters that

connect fixed receptacle panels to loose or fixed equipment will be furnished by this

Contractor.

4. Provide permanent cable identification tags for all cable used in the system. Cable numbers

shall be noted in as-built shop drawings.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Wall and Ceiling Receptacle Boxes

1. Receptacle boxes, where located on the drawings for audio visual raceway system, shall be

in accordance with NEMA/EEMAC, UL 50 Type 1 and IEC 529, IP30.

2. Boxes shall be fabricated from 16 gauge or 14 gauge steel. All boxes shall be provided with

cover plates for flush mounting except where otherwise noted. Knockouts for conduits shall

be as required to meet conduit sizes indicated on plans.

3. Typical device back box shall be the number of gangs as called for on the legend, 3-1/4"

deep unless otherwise noted.

4. Provide knock-outs as required for accommodate specified conduit size.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. RACO, Leviton, Steel City, Hubbell, or As Approved. (RACO 260 - Basis of Design)

2. See electrical specification for additional requirements.

C. See drawings for list of audio visual equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine all work prepared by others to receive work of this Section and report any defects

affecting installation to the Architect for correction.

01/27/2020 325



WILTON, IOWA



B. Commencement of work will be construed as complete acceptance of preparatory work by

others.

C. All devices shall be installed as per applicable sections of Division 26 and in accordance with the

Electrical Code.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work

included. Verify exact location of all electrical devices with architectural drawings. If a

dimension is not indicated on either the architectural or communications drawings, request in

writing, required information prior to proceeding. Any work installed without written direction that

is not specifically indicated on the drawings may be rejected and relocated at Contractor

expense. All finish or other work by others damaged by relocation of any electrical device shall

be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Final location of all equipment shall be located as shown on Contractor's reviewed Shop

Drawings, or as located in the field by the Architect, or as shown on supplementary drawings

prepared by the Consultant. Check drawings of other trades relating to work to verify spaces in

which work will be installed. In centering outlets and locating boxes allow for overhead pipes,

ducts and mechanical equipment, variations in fireproofing and plastering, window and door

trim, paneling, hung ceilings, and the like, and correct any inaccuracy resulting from failure to do

so without expense to Owner.

3.3 RACEWAYS


1. No exposed raceways shall be permitted.

2. Pull no wire; insert no fish wire, until raceway and outlet boxes are permanently in place.

3. Provide cable supports for wire in riser conduits as required by code, if applicable.

4. Provide pull boxes in horizontal conduit running every 100 feet as indicated or wherever

necessary to facilitate pulling in of wire. Coordinate locations with other trades to provide

access.

5. PVC or flexible conduit shall be not be permitted.

6. All conduit penetrations through acoustically rated partitions shall be a maximum of 1/2"

larger than the penetrating conduit and shall be thoroughly caulked with acoustical non-

setting caulk.

7. Provide drag lines with conduit destination noted on drag line to facilitate pulling of cable.

8. No MC shall be permitted for AV conduit.

B. Raceway Grounding & Isolation

1. Signal conduits shall be mechanically and electrically connected to receptacle boxes and

shall be electrically isolated from audio-visual system equipment racks.

2. Provide terminals of conduits with lock nut and insulated bushing for connection to pull

boxes servicing more than one conduit subsystem as described in the separation Guide

Identification table below.

C. Separation of Signal Raceways

1. Microphone level circuits, line level circuits, loudspeaker circuits, video, digital

communication lines (including lighting control) and telephone lines shall be run in separate

conduits. All conduits shall be installed per the table below. If not physically possible to

provide the separation specified for parallel runs over 25', the exterior of the signal conduit

with the lowest voltage shall be completely wrapped in 1/32" thick lead sheet. Where it is

absolutely necessary to cross a conduit with a conduit where separation is called for, the

intersection shall be at 90 degrees and the audio conduit shall be wrapped in 1/32" lead

sheet for a distance of 12" each side of the intersection.

D. The following table shall be used as a guide for the minimum separation required between signal

conduits.

01/27/2020 326



WILTON, IOWA



1. Group Identification

a. Microphone conduit (0mV-100mV)

b. Line level conduit (100mV-10V)

c. Loudspeaker conduit (10V-70.7V)

d. Telephone, video and digital communication conduit

Group a. b. c. d.

a. - 6" 12" 12"

b. 6" - 12" 6"

c. 12" 12" - 6"

d. 12" 6" 6" -

2. Group Identification

a. Dimmer controlled lighting circuits

b. Power circuits (120V and above)

c. Plumbing Pipe

d. Heat sources

Group a. b. c. d.

a. 24" 12" 6" 12"

b. 24" 12" 6” 12”

c. 12 12" 6” 6"

d. 12" 12" 6" 6”

3.4 WORKMANSHIP

A. The installation of all work shall be neat. All boxes, equipment, etc., shall be plumb and square.

B. Following installation, all soiled, abraded or discolored surfaces of work installed herein will be

cleaned and left free from blemishes or defects.

C. Work that is damaged or improperly installed will be removed and replaced and the entire

installation left in complete satisfactory condition.

D. Any damage brought about by Contractor's work shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost

to the Owner.

3.5 SYSTEM TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Initial tests and adjustments shall be performed by the audio visual contractor who shall include

the cost of these tests in his bid proposal. He shall furnish all equipment necessary and perform all

work required to determine or modify the performance of the system in accordance with the

specifications. Audio visual contractor shall carry out the following inspections of the system and

submit to the Consultant the written results at each inspection for inclusion on the permanent

records of the sound system.

B. Verify signal flow through the entire system.

C. Precisely adjust color, contrast and settings and calibrate display technology.

D. Control shall be adjusted for optimum signal to noise ratio and signal balance.

3.6 DUST PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Provide dust protection of all equipment installed at the project site. Dust protection shall be

provided in the form of plastic sheeting or other approved method for all equipment and

material provided herein until Final Acceptance. It is the responsibility of this contractor to provide

daily cleaning of equipment and control room with a vacuum regardless of whom is responsible

for dust.

01/27/2020 327



WILTON, IOWA



B. Fixed loudspeakers shall be covered at all times until Final Acceptance.

C. Following Installation, all soiled, abraded or discolored surfaces of work installed herein shall be

cleaned and left free from blemishes or defects.

D. Work that is damaged or improperly installed shall be removed and replaced and the entire

installation left in complete satisfactory condition.

E. Clean the areas affected by the Work to a level of operational cleanliness. Dispose of protective

covering material and debris accordingly.

3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Contractor shall demonstrate operation of each component of the systems to the Consultant,

Construction Manager and Owner's representative until acceptance is granted.

B. In case the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing,

Contractor's work shall be continued until the systems operate properly.

C. When Final Acceptance testing has concluded to the Owner and Consultant's satisfaction,

Contractor shall submit a written request for Final Acceptance. Guarantees, warranties and

service contracts will commence upon written notification of Final Acceptance by the Architect.

3.8 INSTRUCTION

A. Within two working weeks of system acceptance, the Contractor shall commence a series of

training sessions for persons designated by the Owner.

B. A total of (1) one hour of training, at mutually acceptable times, shall be provided during a two

week period.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 328



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 275116 - 1

SECTION 275116 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Power amplifiers.

B. Digital Signal Processor.

C. Loudspeakers.

D. Conductors and cables.

E. Pathways.

1.2 DESCRIPTION:

A. School hosts an existing paging system that is currently at capacity. In order to extend the system,

the bidding contractor shall provide a line level audio output from the head end equipment to

the new Lobby Addition's IDF closet. Inside this closet the bidding contractor will provide a new

digital signal processor and 70V amplifier to drive all new speakers.

B. The new lobby addition shall be part of the "Commons Area and Hallway" zone of the existing

system. In the event a commons area page or an "all call" page occurs, this new addition shall

share in the broadcast message.

C. The new head end equipment shall also serve the Lobby's new audio system. Provide

programmable logic inside the digital signal processor that gives a broadcast page priority over

any other program audio.





section:






1.5 DEFINITIONS




1.7 SUBMITTALS






01/27/2020 329



WILTON, IOWA



1.10 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Compatibility of Components: Coordinate component features to form an integrated system.

Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Equipment: Comply with UL 813. Equipment shall be modular, using solid-state components, and

fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation

on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.

C. Equipment Mounting: Where rack, cabinet, or console mounting is indicated, equipment shall be

designed to mount in a 19-inch housing complying with EIA/ECA-310-E.

2.2 AMPLIFIERS

A. Serving Lobby/Commons Area Loudspeakers:


a. Crown DriveCore (DCI4x300 Analog) - Basis of Design

b. QSC

c. Engineer Approved Equal

2. Mounting: Rack

3. Output Power: 4-Channel, 70-V balanced line at 300 watts per channel.

4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.40 percent at full rated power output from 20 Hz to 20

kHz.

5. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 108 dB, at rated output.

6. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus .25 dB from 20 to 20 kHz.

B. Serving Hallway, Offices and Restroom Loudspeakers:


a. JBL DriveCore (CSA 240Z) - Basis of Design

b. QSC

c. Engineer Approved Equal

2. Mounting: Rack

3. Output Power: 2-Channel, 70-V balanced line at 40 watts per channel.

4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 50 to 12,000 Hz.

5. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 80 dB, at rated output.

6. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 20 to 12,000 Hz.

7. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.

8. Controls: On-off, input level.

2.3 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR


1. BSS Audio (Blu-50) - Basis of Design

2. Biamp

3. QSC

4. Engineer Approved Equal

B. Mounting: Rack

C. Analog Inputs: Four (4)

D. Analog Outputs: Four (4)

E. Software configurable with the ability to prioritize incoming audio and duck zones as required.

01/27/2020 330



WILTON, IOWA



2.4 LOUDSPEAKERS


1. Quam

2. JBL

3. Atlas IED

4. Community

5. Engineer Approved Equal

B. Type SP-1: 2' x 2' Drop-in Style

1. Type: Complete solution, shallow depth, 2' x 2' ceiling tile replacement loudspeaker. Steel

baffle with perforation and tie-off points. No assembly shall be required.

2. Matching Transformer: Minimum of four (4) taps for a variety of wattages. Highest wattage

shall be a minimum of 5 watts.

3. Volume Control: Integral to the speaker.

4. Frequency Response: 65 Hz to 17kHz.

5. Average Sensitivity: 92 dB 1 watt @ 1 meter.

6. Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees.

7. Mounting: Lay-in with seismic tie-off points.

C. Type SP-2: Cut-in Recessed Style

1. Type: Complete solution, transformer and baffle included. Provide load bearing supports to

protect the ceiling from the weight of the tile.

2. Matching Transformer: Minimum of four (4) taps for a variety of wattages. Highest wattage

shall be a minimum of 5 watts.

3. Volume Control: Integral to the speaker.

4. Frequency Response: 60 Hz to 17kHz.

5. Average Sensitivity: 95 dB 1 watt @ 1 meter.

6. Dispersion Angle: 90 degrees.

D. Type SP-3: Pendant Style

1. Type: Ceiling suspended, pendant style performance speaker.

2. Matching Transformer: Full-power rated with standard 70V taps. Maximum insertion loss of 0.5

dB.

3. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 60 Hz to 22 kHz.

4. Dispersion Angle: Conical 115 degrees.

5. Mounting: Ceiling suspended utilizing aircraft cable.

2.5 OUTLETS

A. Volume Attenuator Station: Wall-plate-mounted autotransformer type with paging priority

feature.

1. Wattage Rating: 10 W unless otherwise indicated.

2. Attenuation per Step: 3 dB, with positive off position.

3. Insertion Loss: 0.4 dB maximum.

4. Attenuation Bypass Relay: SPDT. Connected to operate and bypass attenuation when all-

call, paging, program signal, or prerecorded message features are used. Relay returns to

normal position at end of priority transmission.

5. Label: "PA Volume."

2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper.

1. Insulation for Wire in Conduit: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch thick.

2. Microphone Cables: Neoprene jacketed, not less than 2/64 inch thick, over shield with filled

interstices. Shield No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or approved

equivalent foil. Shielding coverage on conductors is not less than 60 percent.

01/27/2020 331



WILTON, IOWA



3. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.

2.7 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in pathways and except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and

counters, and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where

unenclosed wiring method may be used.. Conceal pathway and cables except in unfinished

spaces.


2. Comply with requirements for pathways and boxes specified in Section 270528 - PATHWAYS



possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and

without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and

distribution spools.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS for

installation of conduits and wireways.

B. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Cable Installation Requirements:

1. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at outlets and terminals.

2. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and

outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.

3. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches

from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.



installation and replace it with new cable.

6. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used.

C. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power wiring

runs. Install in separate pathways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors

at least 12 inches apart for speaker microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone

wiring. Separate other communication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment

manufacturer.

01/27/2020 332



WILTON, IOWA



3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching

networks where required.

C. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable

marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system

wiring diagrams.

D. Equipment Cabinets and Racks:

1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by side, and arrange controls

symmetrically. Mount monitor panel above the amplifiers.

2. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they are accessible at rear of

rack for maintenance and testing, with each item removable from rack without disturbing

other items or connections.

3. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front of rack is occupied by

panels.

E. Volume Limiter/Compressor: Equip each zone with a volume limiter/compressor.

F. Wall-Mounted Outlets: Flush mounted.

G. Floor-Mounted Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles through outlet covers. Secure

outlet covers in place. Trim with carpet in carpeted areas.

H. Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit conductors from racks to

loudspeaker outlets not smaller than No. 16 AWG to amplifiers.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops,

common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and

equipment grounding.

C. Install grounding electrodes as specified in Section 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.




testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance.

2. After installing public address system and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test

for compliance with requirements.

3. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program and page messages at

microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper routing and

volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion.

4. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed signals at

frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1000, 3000, 8000, and 12,000 Hz into each preamplifier channel.

01/27/2020 333



WILTON, IOWA



For each frequency, measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs.

Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 3 percent total harmonics.

5. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves centered at 500 and

4000 Hz. Use sound-level meter with octave-band filters to measure level at five locations in

each zone. For spaces with seated audiences, maximum permissible variation in level is plus

or minus 2 dB. In addition, the levels between locations in same zone and between locations

in adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.

6. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each power amplifier at normal gain

settings of 50, 1000, and 12,000 Hz. Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies

must not exceed plus or minus 1 dB.

7. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at public address equipment

signal ground. Comply with testing requirements specified in Section 270526 - GROUNDING

AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

E. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and

terminals are identified. Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line matching

transformers.

F. Public address system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

1. Include a record of final speaker-line matching transformer-tap settings and signal ground-

resistance measurement certified by Installer.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and

installation requirements.

2. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site

assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting transformer taps, and adjusting controls to meet

occupancy conditions.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,


two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain the public address system and equipment. Refer to Section 017900

"Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 334



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 280000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY &

SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 1

SECTION 280000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Division 28 specifications are provided to define the standards and criteria to be used to bid,

plan, furnish, install, test, and document electronic safety & security systems for Wilton

Community School District's Lobby Addition. These specifications shall form the basis for

implementation of the design, installation, inspection, and close-out process.

B. Division 28 has been designed and developed based on the most current and adopted

International Series Building and Fire Code, Facility Guidelines, Iowa Administrative Code and

Amendments, NFPA 72, NFPA 70 (NEC), and National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) requirements.

The requirements within those documents are not superseded herein unless specifically stated.

Code requirements are unable to be superseded by this document at any time. The absence of

a specific reference to an element within the aforementioned codes, and standards does not

relieve all parties of compliance with them.

C. Within this document use of the word “shall” marks mandatory requirements. Use of the word

“may” or “should” suggests optional elements. All conflicts within this document shall be resolved

by the Construction Manager in consultation with the Design Team. The standards of Wilton

Community School District shall take precedence in the resolution of any dispute.

D. Unauthorized changes and/or deviations from these specifications, regardless of scale, may result

in re-design, reconstruction, or re-installation of communications elements at the contractor’s

expense. Contractors shall obtain formal written approval prior to bidding and prior to installation

in order to deviate from these specifications. Contractors shall not deviate from code

requirements.

E. Division 28 Specifications address information transport pathways, multiple different types of

Safety and Security systems, spaces, media, grounding, identification, testing, and

documentation requirements in support of multiple information transport infrastructures.

F. Specific responsibilities of Division 28 include, but are not limited to:

1. Installation of the intra-building pathways, cabling, and coordinating space requirements

necessary to house the safety and security systems and associated electronic information

transport equipment. Pathways and spaces shall be provided to support the known systems

and cabling requirements, as well as provisions for those that may be required in the future

for growth purposes.

2. The procurement and installation of each safety and security system and the associated

components and cabling to create a fully functional system.

3. Thorough testing shall be conducted of each individual safety and security system to

illustrate compliance with specific performance requirements.

4. Definition and establishment of administration and labeling schemes, conforming to Owner's

requirements.

5. Securing all necessary permits and licenses, payment of all fees, and provision of all

construction work notifications.

6. Compliance with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations.

7. Mandatory project manager attendance at a weekly project status meeting with the

General Contractor.

8. It is the intent of the project drawings and specifications to provide complete and fully

functional Division 28 safety and security systems, ready for use. Any item, not specifically

shown in the project drawings or called for in the project specifications but normally

required for a complete systems, is to be considered a part of this contract.

G. System Continuity:

01/27/2020 335



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 2

1. Reconnect all existing items that remain in use. Provide all materials and labor required to

retain continuity of existing circuits or systems that are disrupted by these alterations even

though not indicated on the drawings.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 00 & 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.


section:




CABLING


5. Section 280505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

6. Section 281316 - SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

7. Section 282000 - VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8. Section 284600 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM



1. AC - Alternating Current

2. ANSI -American National Standards Institute

3. API - Application Programming Interface

4. AWG - American Wire Gauge

5. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

6. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute

7. DC - Direct Current

8. DNS - Domain Name System

9. DPDT - Double Pull-Double Throw

10. DVMS - Digital Video Management System

11. DVR - Digital Video Recorder

12. EACS - Electronic Access Control System

13. EMT - Electrical Metallic Tubing

14. FACP - Fire Alarm Control Panel

15. FCC - Federal Communications Commission

16. FTP - File Transfer Protocol

17. HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

18. ID - Identification

19. IEC - International Environmental Corporation.

20. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

21. IP - Internet Protocol

22. IS - Integrated Systems

23. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

24. LAN - Local Area Networks

25. LDAP - Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

26. LED - Light Emitting Diode

27. mA - Milliampere.

28. NAS - Network-Attached Storage

29. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association

30. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

31. NFPA - National Fire Protection Area

01/27/2020 336



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 3

32. NICET -

33. NRTL - Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories.

34. NVR - Network Video Recorder

35. ODBC - Open Database Connectivity

36. ONVIF - Open Network Video Interface Forum

37. OS - Operation Systems

38. OVID - Open Video Interface Document

39. PC - Personal Computer

40. PIN - Personal Identification Number

41. PIR - Passive Infrared

42. PSIA - Physical Security Interoperability Alliance

43. RAID - Redundant Array of Independent Disks

44. RFI - Radio-Frequency Interface

45. RFID - Radio Frequency Identification

46. RoHS - Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive

47. ROM - Read Only Memory

48. SFTP - Secure File Transfer Protocol

49. SHA - Secure Hash Algorithm

50. SIA - Security Industry Association

51. SLA - Sealed Lead Acid

52. SLDAP - Secure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

53. SMS - Security Management System.

54. SQL - Structured Query Language

55. SSL - Secure Sockets Layer

56. STI - Speech Transmission Index

57. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association.

58. TCP - Transmission Control Protocol

59. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

60. UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply

61. VMS - Video Management System

62. WAN - Wide Area Network


A. The project involves the Wilton Community School with added square footage. Some portions of

the building will not require work and those that are will be installed so that they match the

existing building standards.


A. All work shall be in compliance with the following codes and agencies. Nothing contained within

these specifications shall be misconstrued to permit work not in conformance with the most

stringent of applicable codes and standards. It is assumed that bidders have access to, and

specific knowledge of, the listed reference materials in order to ensure conformity with them.

1. International Building Code

2. International Fire Code

3. Facility Guidelines Institute

4. National Electrical Code (NEC)

5. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

7. Iowa Administrative Code (IAC)

8. National Electronic Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

9. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA)

10. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

01/27/2020 337



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 4

B. All new materials, equipment, and installation practices shall meet the requirements of the

following standards, unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Design Team.

1. Federal, State, and local codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.

a. Perform all work in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements that is governing

the work and as fully part of the specifications attached.


A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of the safety and security systems with the Electrical

contractor and the Owner's selected carrier.

B. Sequencing: Ensure that any fire alarm, access control and video surveillance cutover is

achieved in a coordinated and orderly manner.

C. All Division 28 Contractor Project Managers shall schedule and conduct a coordination meeting

with Wilton Community School District to confirm and coordinate scope of work requirements

prior to commencement of work. Project meetings shall be scheduled through the general

contractor.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 1 for exact submittal procedures.

B. The Division 28 contractor shall provide for review, without exception prior to material acquisition

and installation, three (3) copies of the following items. Failure to submit required items shall

disqualify the bidder.

1. Product Data Sheets (Catalog Cuts)

2. Riser/Cabling Diagrams

3. System Schematics

4. Specification Sheets for Test Equipment

5. Bill of Materials

6. Contracting Firm Qualifications and Certifications

7. Installation Team Qualifications by Individual

8. Current Manufacturer Certifications

C. In addition to the above submittal information, the fire detection and alarm contractor shall also

adhere to the authority having jurisdiction (local and/or state) submittal requirements. The bid

represented by this contractor shall include the necessary fees required for this governing body

to review the project.

D. Provide throughout installation:

1. Material samples, if requested by the design team.

2. Periodic field quality control reports.

E. Provide at completion of each construction phase area:

1. System test and certification reports; summary hard copy or full test results on compact disc

when requested by the owner or design team. Reports shall be submitted to the requesting

party within seven (7) calendar days.

2. One (1) set of record drawings of the actual installation of the Division 28 systems. Drawings

shall be given as full size originals and on disk in AutoCAD format

F. Provide at final completion, three (3) bound sets of O&M (Operating and Maintenance) Manuals

formatted as defined by Division 1 and one (1) electronic copy provided on a CD/DVD disc.

Each copy of the O&M Manual shall include, at minimum, items listed as follows:

1. System test and certification reports; summary hard copy and full test results on disc. Test

results shall be delivered at the completion of each project phase and at any time when

called for by the Owner.

2. Provide one (1) full-size hard copy set of record drawings (as-builts) to be submitted to the

Design Team for approval, immediately upon completion of the installation.

01/27/2020 338



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 5

3. Instruction manuals including equipment and schedules, operating instructions, and

manufacturer's instructions.

4. Manufacturer warranty certificate.

5. Warranty contacts including but not limited to: names, telephone numbers (office and

mobile).


A. Contracting firm shall constitute a company with a minimum of five (5) years successful

installation experience with projects utilizing infrastructure and systems work similar to that

required for this project.

B. Fire alarm contractor shall have at least one (1) NICET Level II on staff responsible for this project.

Provide copies of these certificates in the submittal process.

C. Work crew, not involved in final connections to the fire alarm system (e.g. laborers

delivering/moving materials, installing grounding by an electrician, or workers installing pathway

elements) do not require NICET or manufacturer certification or registration.

D. Contractor shall provide with a manufacturer certification for the system solution bid, issued

directly in the bidder’s company name, valid for the time frame in which the installation will be

completed. Contractor shall be manufacturer certified in order to participate in the bid event.

E. The Contractor shall be knowledgeable in local, state, regional, and national codes and

regulations. All work shall comply with the latest revision of codes or regulations. When conflict

exists between local or national codes or regulations, the most stringent codes or regulations shall

apply.

F. Only installers trained and certified by the proposed manufacturer shall be allowed to install

products. Installers must possess the highest level of certification available by the manufacturer

for the specific solution being installed.

G. Only installers trained and certified by the proposed manufacturer shall be allowed to install

firestop products.

H. Only installers trained and certified by the proposed systems manufacturer shall be allowed to

terminate and test any of the electronic safety & security systems. Others may pull cabling and

install field devices under the supervision of an installer trained and certified by the manufacturer.

I. Service Qualifications: Installing and servicing contractor shall have a permanent office within a

120 mile radius of the project site.

J. Before bidding, the contractor shall study and compare all contract documents and promptly

notify the Design Team of any discrepancies or deficiencies discovered by or made known to the

contractor.

K. Discrepancies: Whenever a discrepancy or inconsistency exists between related information

indicated on the contract drawings and/or specifications, this contractor shall obtain additional

clarification and direction from the Design Team before proceeding. For bidding purposes, this

contractor shall include the labor and materials necessary to comply with the solution that results

in the greatest cost to the contract.

1. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, then the more stringent requirement

shall apply.

2. The failure to question any controversial item will constitute acceptance by the bidder who

shall execute it to the satisfaction of the owner after being awarded the contract.

L. Deficiencies: The contractor and associated subcontractors shall resolve all known deficiencies

and omissions, including non-compliance with applicable codes, with the Design Team prior to

ordering materials or proceeding with the work. Any work performed prior to receipt of

instructions from the Design Team will be done so at the contractors risk.

1. If mention has been omitted pertaining to details, items or related accessories required for

the completion of any system, it is understood such item and accessories are included in the

contract. After the contract is awarded, claims based on insufficient data or incorrectly

01/27/2020 339



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 6

assumed conditions, or claims based on misunderstanding the nature of the work, will not be

recognized.

2. All devices, symbols and work illustrated shall be new work provided under this contract

except work labeled existing to remain and equipment labeled to be furnished (or supplied)

by others, but installed by this contractor.


A. Equipment, materials, and supplies shall be shipped, handled and stored in ways that shall

prevent damage to the items.

B. All items shall be handled and stored as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of

stored products to assure that products are maintained under manufacturer's specified

conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

D. Equipments, materials, and supplies to be incorporated in the area of work shall be new unless

otherwise noted.

E. Equipment, materials, and supplies shall be produced in a good workmanlike manner.

F. When the quality of a material, process, or article is not specifically set forth in the Drawings or

Specifications, the best available quality of the material, process, or article shall be provided.


A. Conditions and Measurements: Visit the jobsite to verify installation conditions and confirm

measurements for all required systems and associated cabling connectivity.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall submit, in the bid documents, any additional contractor-specific warranties

or guarantees to be offered on the project.

B. The Contractor shall supply any and all necessary documentation needed to process and record

the warranty(s) and to verify the installation solution.

C. Unless listed elsewhere within these specifications, a warranty shall be provided for a minimum of

one (1) year for all safety and security systems. One year shall begin from the date of Substantial

Completion. This warranty shall cover both product and service to address remedial

maintenance and replacement parts as is appropriate to keep each system complete and fully

functional.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER’S, PRODUCTS, AND SERVICES

A. If a bidder proposes to substitute an article, device, material, equipment, form of construction,

fixture, or item other than the approved manufacturers and part numbers, listed and named in

the specifications, the bidder shall certify that the proposed item is equal in quality and all

aspects of performance and appearance, to the items specified. The bidder shall submit a

request for substitution to the Design Team by following the instruction in Specification Section 01

6000, which must include:

1. The name and complete description of the proposed Substitution including Drawings,

performance and test data, and other information necessary for a complete evaluation;

and

2. A statement setting forth any changes that the Proposed Substitution will require in the

Contract Documents or the project.

B. If the Design Team approves the proposed substitution, the Design Team shall issue an

Addendum. If the Design Team does not approve the substitution, the Design Team shall inform

the bidder of its decision, which is final. The Design Team may reject a proposed Substitution

01/27/2020 340



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 7

because the bidder failed to provide sufficient information to enable the Design Team to

completely evaluate the proposed substitution without causing a delay in the scheduled bid

opening.

C. Proposed substitutions received by the Design Team after the allotted time allowed by Section 01

6000 shall not be considered.

D. Bidder shall confirm all reference part numbers, listed within Division 28, as current and suitable for

the items described and specified and shall file a formal RFI for all perceived discrepancies prior

to bidding.

E. All materials associated with reference parts shall be included so as to constitute a complete and

functional system, whether or not specifically identified and itemized.

F. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by

the manufacturer which will provide service to the project site within two (2) hours of receipt of

notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations during the

submittal process.

2.2 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES

A. Where additional conduits are needed beyond those shown on the drawings to accommodate

the installation of systems, this contractor (Division 28) shall include such provisions in this contract.

Provide conduit suitable for its application and sized in accordance with industry standards.

Include nylon bushings at conduit ends and firestopping as required around conduits wherever

building barriers are penetrated. If necessary, this contractor shall hire a qualified contractor to

perform this work.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Wilton Community School District shall not be responsible for delays in work because of

shutdowns due to unsafe working practices by Contractors.

B. Contractor shall clean work areas each day and remove debris properly and legally from the

property. Materials and supplies stored for use in the project shall be neatly stacked outside the

circulation areas. All exits and paths shall be cleaned so as to prevent dirt from being tracked

into the facilities.

C. Contractor shall ensure that all building fixtures have been re-installed to their original condition

at the conclusion of the final shift of the day.

D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure any parking permits prior to the first day of

work on-site.

E. Work outside of normal operating hours and days shall be coordinated with Wilton Community

School District.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Division 28 Contractor shall thoroughly clean all enclosures, assemblies and field devices before

they are turned over to Wilton Community School District for operation. Should the special

system’s room(s) be completed prior to the balance of the floor space construction that it serves,

racks, cabinets, and wall frames shall be covered with plastic sheeting to repel dust and other

contaminants to which they will be subjected.

3.3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. All contract work shall be performed in accordance with the policies, procedures, and standards

established by the Wilton Community School District.

B. In construction areas, all Contractor personnel shall wear personnel protection devices, as

deemed appropriate by the Construction Manager and as required by OSHA for the work

01/27/2020 341



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280000 - 8

location and work operation being performed. Devices shall include, but not be limited to

hardhats, work boots, safety eye protection, reflective vests, etc.

C. All exposed holes, pits, pipes, etc., either inside or outside the project facilities, shall be

barricaded or plated and adequately secured when Contractor personnel are not present. All

ladders, hanging wires, pipes, and other items protruding at a pedestrian level travel way most

be removed or secured following the final shift of the day.

D. During breaks or when only a portion of work has been completed, tools shall not be left exposed

where others may risk injury or attempt to use them. Windows and doors shall not be left

unsecured or propped open during breaks. At the completion of the final shift each day, doors,

windows, or other openings shall be adequately secured.

E. When driving on property, Contractor personnel shall observe all traffic safety regulations and

pay particular attention to pedestrians. All loose material and debris on vehicles shall be

adequately secured and tied down.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 342



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 280505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY SYSTEMS

280505 - 1

SECTION 280505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Demolition, temporary removal, relocation, or reconfiguration of selected site elements

and/or Information Technology (IT), Security or other Special Systems or infrastructure.

3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Contractor shall include in the Bid all labor, materials, tools, transportation, storage costs,

equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, inspections, taxes and all necessary and

related items required to provide complete demolition and cutover of existing

telecommunication systems shown and described in the drawings and specifications herein.

C. The Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating phased activities and construction

methods that minimize disruption to operations and provide complete and operational systems.

Equipment and devices shall not be removed or reconfigured until removal or reconfiguration

has been coordinated with owner and approval is given in writing.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate interfaces to existing systems that are being demolished in order

to minimize disruption to the existing systems operations. Any systems outages shall be approved

in advance and scheduled with Wilton Community School District.





section:



A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far

as practical.

C. Field verify the existing conditions, device equipment locations to determine the extent of the

demolition required. Notify the Design Team of discrepancies between existing conditions and

Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify the

Design Team. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against

damage during selective demolition operations.


A. Comply quality assurance requirements listed in section 280000 - IDENTIFICATION FOR


01/27/2020 343



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280505 - 2


A. Comply with codes and standards listed in section 280000 - IDENTIFICATION FOR



A. Pre-Demolition Meeting

1. Conduct a pre-demolition meeting at Project Site with Wilton Community School District and

all affected stakeholders.

a. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

b. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

c. Existing telecommunications rooms that have demolition work may involve electrical,

mechanical and architectural demolition. Review and coordinate requirements of

work performed by other trades.

d. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

e. Review procedures to be followed when critical systems are inadvertently interrupted.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required with Wilton

Community School District prior to device removal to ensure systems that must remain

operational are not compromised during the demolition process.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Demolition and construction methods shall conform to Wilton Community School District

requirements, requirements of the State of Iowa and all applicable building codes.

B. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and

as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing

regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically. Complete selective demolition operations

above each floor or tier, before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level, if

applicable. Remove all abandoned cable from origin to destination.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use

hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to

remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and/or portable fire-

suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free

fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

01/27/2020 344



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280505 - 3

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's designated storage area. Coordinate delivery of equipment with

Wilton Community School District seven (7) days prior to delivery.


D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.


4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

5. Perform testing on reinstalled active systems and get sign-off by a the Owner or Owner’s

representative inspector that systems are re-connected and working properly.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Engineer, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped per approved procedures before

starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey existing condition of all communications systems related conduits and cables from origin

to destination and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective

demolition required.

C. Label all conduits and cables with origin, destination and what system they serve.

D. Consult with the Owner to determine whether systems can be disabled or whether a new parallel

system needs to be installed.

E. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to the Design Team.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect

them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions.

2. For existing equipment with active components in them, provide dust protection and

circulate cooling air with a portable air conditioning unit or other means to ensure

equipment does not overheat.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, or Relocated: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or

cap off indicated utility services and communications systems serving areas to be selectively

demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

Coordinate the disconnection of all electrical circuits with the Electrical Contractor prior to

disconnection.

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

01/27/2020 345



WILTON, IOWA



SECURITY SYSTEMS

280505 - 4

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection.

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage

and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site

and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate onsite.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.

B. The contractor shall be required, on a daily basis, to dispose of any demolished material not

required to be returned to the Owner. All materials shall be transported off of the Owner’s

property at the expense of the Contractor.

C. At the end of each work day or shift, the Contractor shall be required to clean-up the work area

and remove all construction debris such that the site is clean and usable without hazard to

workers.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 346



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 281316 - SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 281316 - 1

SECTION 281316 - SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. System Requirements

B. Hardware Enclosures

C. Software

D. Peripherals

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Extend the existing Rosslare AxTraxNG platform for security management system.

B. The SMS includes the following sub-components:

1. Software updates on the system.

2. Firmware updates on the existing controllers.

3. New network connected field level controllers.

1.3 QUALIFIED BIDDERS

A. Heartland Fire & Security

1. Contact Name: Victor Obertance

2. Telephone Number: 563-343-4638

3. Email Address: [email protected]





section:




A. Reference Section 280000 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.6 DEFINITIONS




B. The SMS shall be certified by to meet the following standards:

1. UL294 Listed

2. ISO 9000 Listed

3. FCC Part 15

4. RoHS

1.8 SUBMITTALS


01/27/2020 347



WILTON, IOWA





B. Electrical Components, Devices, Accessories, and Installation shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

1. Comply with NECA 1.

2. Comply with NFPA 70.

3. Comply with NFPA 101.

C. Software integration between the SMS, VMS, and all other integrated system components shall

be tested and certified for interoperability by the manufacturers of each system.



1.11 WARRANTY


1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. SMS components shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions

without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. All Components:

a. Operation: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 32 to 95 deg F

(0 to 35 deg C) and a relative humidity of 5 to 90 percent, noncondensing.

b. Storage: Component storage at ambient temperatures of -4 to 120 deg F (-20 to 49

deg C) and relative humidity of 5 to 90 percent, non-condensing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. The following are approved manufacturers:

1. Rosslare (extend existing)

2. No Engineer Approved Equal

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Operational Requirements

1. The SMS shall be implemented through network field controller architecture:

a. The controllers shall be capable of running on an existing TCP/IP network and shall be

accessible, configurable, and manageable from any network-connected PC with a

browser and/or Rosslare client software loaded.

b. The network controllers shall offer the following capacities:

1) Access Control: Each enclosure shall support either a 2 reader or 4 reader

configuration, four supervised inputs, and four relay outputs.

2) Alarm Input: shall support up to eight supervised inputs.

3) Relay Output: shall support up to eight relay outputs.

c. Provide the appropriate quantity of controller hardware necessary to extend the

Rosslare access control system to each identified opening on the drawings.

2.3 HARDWARE ENCLOSURES

A. The SMS shall have hardware enclosures available for wall mounting. The wall-mount enclosures

shall have a lock requiring a key, and a cabinet door tamper switch.

01/27/2020 348



WILTON, IOWA



B. One enclosure shall be provided with either a 2-door or 4-door controller. Another enclosure shall

provide system power to all controllers as well as additional power supplies as required to

interface with the scheduled electrified locking components found in specification section

087100. Coordinate voltage options of 12/24VDC directly with the door hardware installer.

2.4 SOFTWARE

A. Software Update and Licensing:

1. Provide any and all required licensing necessary for the existing system to absorb the newly

scheduled openings.

2. Provide a system-wide software update to the Rosslare platform. Ensure all controllers and

field devices are operating on the latest stable firmware release.

2.5 PERIPHERALS

A. Card Readers, Credential Cards, and Keypads

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Rosslare - Standard Proximity Reader

b. Engineer Approved Equal

2. Card-Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby power

source, and shall not dissipate more than 5W.

3. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal that is

sent to the controller. Response time shall be 800ms or less, from the time the card reader

finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.

4. Prior to ordering, ensure card reader technology is compatible with the current credential

assigned to all staff. Existing cards and readers are standard proximity utilizing a typical 26-bit

card format.

5. Communications Protocol: Compatible with local processor.

B. Door Position Switches

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. George Risk Industries (GRI)

b. Substitutions: See 280000 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Flush-mount: Provide recessed 3/4" magnetic reed switch set for all hollow frame

applications. Utilize double pole double throw switches to allow for an additional set of

contacts.

a. Equal to GRI 195-12 Series.

3. Surface-Mount: Provide surface mounted magnetic reed switch set for all filled frames in

which a concealed pathway is not possible. Utilize double pole double throw switches to

allow for an additional set of contacts.

a. Equal to GRI 29PD Series.

C. Cables

1. General Cable Requirements: Provide a plenum rated solution that complies with the

security management system manufacturer's recommendations for each application.

Providing individual pair and multi-pair cables or a composite cable is an approved

method.

2. Review all amperage and distance requirements for proper wire gauge selection.

Coordinate this selection with the specified electrified door hardware.

D. Transformers

1. NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access-control

system shall not be shared with any other system.

01/27/2020 349



WILTON, IOWA



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine cable pathways including conduit, raceways, cable trays, and other pathway elements

for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and

other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine rough-in for control cable and conduit systems to controllers, card readers, and other

EACS components to verify conduit and back-box locations prior to installation of EACS devices

C. Examine available network capacity and support infrastructure. Consult with network

administrator for compliance with network standards and capacity.

D. Examine install location for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to

safe system operation, and other conditions affecting installation.

E. Examine roughing-in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with SIA CP-01 Control Panel Standard.

B. Comply with ANSI/TIA-606-B Labelling Standard.

C. Prepare detailed project planning forms for programming and configuration of the SMS. Fill in all

data available from project plans and specifications and publish as project planning documents

for review and approval. These may include (but are not limited to):

1. Define SMS Partitions.

2. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements.

3. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for

doors.

4. Set up groups, facility codes, software triggers, and list inputs and outputs for each

controller.

5. Assign action message names and compose messages.

6. Set up alarms. Establish trigger actions between events and video surveillance features.

7. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps.

8. Develop user-defined fields.

9. Develop screen layout formats.

10. Discuss badge layout options; design badges.

11. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification.

12. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration.

13. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test.

14. Develop cable and asset-management system details; input data from construction

documents. Include system schematics and technical drawings in electronic format.

D. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust,

and prepare final programming and configuration documents. Use final documents to program

and configure SMS software.

3.3 CABLING

A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction".

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks,

and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

C. Junction boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which

are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with tamper resistant

fasteners and/or tamper detection switches. In addition, hinged enclosure doors shall be

equipped with locking hardware. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building

01/27/2020 350



WILTON, IOWA



shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling

level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover

plate and secured with tamperproof screws.

D. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location.

3.4 CABLE APPLICATION

A. Comply with TIA 569-C, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces."

B. Card Readers and Keypads and Peripheral Devices:

1. Install number of conductor pairs recommended by device manufacturer for the functions

specified.

2. Follow device manufacturer’s installation requirements for maximum cable distances and

sizes.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic

Equipment."

B. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to

minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

C. Signal Ground:

1. Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and

equipment grounding.

2. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Section 270553 -

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

1. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each

cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted

device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown.

C. At completion, cable and asset management documentation shall reflect as-built conditions.

3.7 SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE

A. Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform database tests for the complete

and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner.


A. Perform tests and inspections:



testing.


1. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to,

measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and

leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be

operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated

battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special

or dedicated equipment.

01/27/2020 351



WILTON, IOWA



2. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product

capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end

performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when

tests have been satisfactorily completed.

C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were

developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Enroll and prepare badges and access cards for Owner's operators, management, and security

personnel.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 30 days of date of Substantial Completion,


two visits to Project for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Check cable connections.

2. Check proper operation of card readers, intrusion sensors, integrated systems, and

database configuration. Verify SMS configuration and adjust settings needed.

3. Recommend changes to SMS configuration and settings to improve Owner's use of SMS.

4. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system.

See Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training".

B. Develop and provide separate training modules for the following:

1. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases

and to update and maintain software.

2. Operators who prepare and input credentials, monitor the SMS, and to enroll personnel.

3. Security personnel.

4. Hardware maintenance personnel.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 352



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 282000 - VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 282000 - 1

SECTION 282000 - VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Video management system.

B. Video recording and viewing equipment.

C. Cameras.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Extend the owners existing Milestone digital video management system currently installed at the

Wilton Community School District for video surveillance. Provide the necessary camera channel

licensing necessary for the existing system to absorb all the new cameras illustrated on the

drawings.





section:





1.5 DEFINITIONS




1.7 SUBMITTALS






1.10 WARRANTY


1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical

damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, installed in air-conditioned

temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in

01/27/2020 353



WILTON, IOWA



ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity,

noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures.

2. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be

rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F dry

bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation

when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to

24 inches thick.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide a complete software and hardware solution from the following approved manufacturers:

1. Digital Video Management System Platform

a. Milestone Systems - XProtect 2019 Professional Plus (Existing to be extended)

b. Substitutions: See Section 280000 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

2.2 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. The software platform is existing with no anticipated software or hardware changes needed.

2.3 VIDEO RECORDING AND VIEWING EQUIPMENT

A. Recording Server

1. Existing Milestone XProtect recording server shall remain.

2.4 CAMERAS

A. Refer to the drawings and details for camera schedule to define manufacturer, model, recording

parameters as well as quantity and locations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for

compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and

other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine rough-in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation.


3.2 WIRING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated.

1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics.

2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions.

3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and

without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and

distribution spools.

D. For communication wiring, comply with the following:

1. Section 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING.

01/27/2020 354



WILTON, IOWA



3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install cameras with 84-inch-minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change

type of mounting to achieve required clearance.

B. Set camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera under the supervision of

the Principal of the Elementary School.

C. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 270553 -

IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS



and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.



testing.


1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled,

and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify

that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels,

including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for

acceptance and operational testing as follows:

a. Prepare equipment list described in "Informational Submittals" Article.

b. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses.

c. Set sensitivity of motion detection.

d. Connect and verify responses to alarms.

e. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system

has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days'

notice of test schedule.

4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with

Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation

in all functional modes.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,


two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall


1. Check cable connections.

2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and

adjust back-focus as needed.

3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel.

4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's

use of video surveillance system.

5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

01/27/2020 355



WILTON, IOWA



B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and

monitor screens.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video-surveillance

equipment.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 356



WILTON, IOWA


SECTION 284600 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM 284600 - 1

SECTION 284600 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fire-alarm control unit.

B. Remote Emergency communications panel.

C. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

D. System smoke detectors.

E. Heat detectors.

F. Audio and Visual Notification appliances.

G. Magnetic Door Holders

H. Addressable Interface Device

I. Remote annunciator.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Extend the existing Notifier NFS2-640 fire alarm system in to the new addition. The existing system is

addressable, and has capacity to support the finished building. Provide all necessary

components to extend system and comply with NFPA. Existing system also hosts an emergency

communications system. Extend the voice coverage to the new addition.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 00 & 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.


section:




CABLING



6. Section 280505 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEMS


A. See Section 280000 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

1.5 DEFINITIONS


B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.



1.7 SUBMITTALS


01/27/2020 357



WILTON, IOWA







1.10 WARRANTY



A. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are

placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Provide system manufacturer's

certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and voice/strobe

evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Duct smoke detectors.

5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

6. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances including voice evacuation notices.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

9. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

3. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

01/27/2020 358



WILTON, IOWA



D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module,

remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

7. Break in standby battery circuitry.

8. Failure of battery charging.

9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

10. Voice signal amplifier failure.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, and remote annunciators.

3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.

4. Transmit system status to building management system.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Extend existing Notifier NFS2-640 system.

2. No Engineer Approved Equal.

B. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.

2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.

C. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control

unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.

4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

D. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible (speaker) appliances shall sound using either a three-pulse temporal pattern or an

automated voice message specific to the alarm condition. Interface existing Fire Alarm

Control Unit with a new remote emergency communications (voice) panel. Refer to the

Drawings for location of devices as well as the new remote voice panel.

2. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the

same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

E. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in

smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke

detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those

settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated

changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-

adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on

system printer.

01/27/2020 359



WILTON, IOWA



G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and

trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

H. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-

supply module rating.

I. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and

automatic transfer switch.

J. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass

cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate

response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under

normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 REMOTE EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS PANEL


1. Source from the same manufacturer as the control unit.

B. General Requirements for Emergency Communications Panel: Pre-Amplifier, Amplifier and control

interface shall all be compatible with all field notification appliances. The amplifier shall be sized

appropriately to handle all speakers and combination speaker/strobe devices illustrated on the

drawings while leaving 50% room for growth purposes.

C. Provide speech transmission index (STI) and common intelligibility scale (CSI) levels of audio to

meet NFPA 72 requirements. Adjust individual device volume as required in each area.

D. Emergency communications panel shall host both the option to manually broadcast an

announcement or activate pre-recorded messages.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES



B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in

red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible

indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface

mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integral addressable

module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-

alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-

powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS



B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

01/27/2020 360



WILTON, IOWA



3. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection to building wiring.

4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore

them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated.

6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm

control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify

the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify

the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the

supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct

size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.7 HEAT DETECTORS



B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate

of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.

01/27/2020 361



WILTON, IOWA





D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 190 deg F

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.



2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES



B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting

assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system

connections.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal

white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in

minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall or ceiling mounted as indicated.

3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

D. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Comply with UL 1480.

2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the

intelligibility requirements of the "Notification Appliances" and "Emergency Communications

Systems" chapters in NFPA 72.

3. High-Fidelity Speakers: Rated ¼ W to 2 W.

4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.

5. Mounting: Flush for all wall and ceiling locations.

6. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with

matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.

2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.

01/27/2020 362



WILTON, IOWA



3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices

for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the connected equipment.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.

2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for field

wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.

2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. At the new lobby entrance, provide a small form-factor remote annunciator panel equal to

Notifier #FDU-80 that is compatible with the NFS2-640 control unit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,

humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been

permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before

installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before

installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation

and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in

NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be

replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,

debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished

floor.

C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit

doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in

NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in

NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

01/27/2020 363



WILTON, IOWA



4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas shall be determined according to Annex A in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 60 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture

and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

E. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover

shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend

the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install

detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

G. Air-Sampling Smoke Detectors: If using multiple pipe runs, the runs shall be pneumatically

balanced.

H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,

sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing

position.

I. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke

partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and

devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before

making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and

systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an

addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system

being controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

2. Magnetically held-open doors.

3. Electronically locked doors and access gates.

4. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 270553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire

from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.

01/27/2020 364



WILTON, IOWA




A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.




D. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation

that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the

"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of

the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the

"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2

requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and

the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or

replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,

quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system

complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for

initial tests and inspections.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service

organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and

supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the

"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing

and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

01/27/2020 365



WILTON, IOWA



B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial

Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for

using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 366


SECTION 31 23 00 - FOUNDATION EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 00 - 1

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK SECTION 31 23 00 - FOUNDATION EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Foundation, excavating, and backfilling within five feet of the building perimeter. Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:

1. Removal of all unacceptable soil. 2. Furnish and install acceptable fill. 3. Prepare subgrade for footings and slab on grade.

B. The following items are not a part of this specification:

1. Utility trenching and related backfilling outside the building footprint. 2. Subgrade for exterior walks and paving.

C. Structural notes indicated on the drawings regarding foundation excavating and backfilling shall be considered part of this specification.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Pertinent Section of Division 01. B. Pertinent Sections of Division 31.

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. 2. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort. 3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

the Modified Effort. 4. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified

Soil Classification System). 5. ASTM D2940 - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases

for Highways or Airports. 6. ASTM D4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils

Using a Vibratory Table. 7. ASTM D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and

Calculation of Relative Density. 8. ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. 9. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-

Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

01/27/2020 367












Foundation Preparation Con

tinuo

us

Perio

dic

Verify materials below shallow footings are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity.

X

Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. X

Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials. X

Verify use of proper materials, densities, and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill.

X

Prior to placement of compacted fill, inspect subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly. X

B. Minimum testing frequency and locations:

1. Laboratory Testing:

a. Granular fill: One representative gradation test for each type of material.

b. Cohesive soils: One representative set of Atterberg limits and moisture density test for each type of material used.

c. Non-cohesive soils: One representative moisture density test for each type of material used.

01/27/2020 368



2. Field Testing:

a. The Special Inspector shall determine the location of testing.

b. Testing of final utility trench backfill shall begin at a depth of 2 feet above the top of the pipe.

c. In-place field density test and moisture content tests shall be performed as follows:

1) Fills not within the influence of building foundations and slab on grade: Per civil specifications.

2) Fills within the influence of building foundations and slab on grade, the following criteria shall apply: One test for each 8-inch vertical lift of compacted fill placed per 2,500 square feet of fill area (minimum of two tests per lift per structure for areas smaller than 5,000 square feet).

d. Additional testing may be required by the Special Inspector if noncompliance or a change in conditions occurs.

e. If a test fails, the Contractor shall rework the material, recompact and retest as necessary until specific compaction is achieved in all areas of the trench. All costs associated with this work, including retesting, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: Provide the Owner and Architect with the on-site material test reports from the Special Inspection Agency indicating the interpreting test results for compliance with this specification.

1.6 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall provide for design, permits and installation of all cribbing, bracing, shoring and other methods required to safely retain earth banks and excavations.

B. Notify the Architect immediately and discontinue work in affected area if adjacent existing footings are encountered during excavation. Underpin other adjacent structures that may be damaged by excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases.

C. Notify the Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in affected areas until notification to resume.

D. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, curbing, etc., from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.

E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities that are to remain.

F. Provide temporary heating or protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundations soils against freezing temperatures or frost during cold weather conditions.

01/27/2020 369



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient acceptable soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Acceptable soils shall comply with the following:

1. Meet ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM or a combination of these group symbols;

2. Be free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension;

3. Be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious materials;

4. Have a liquid limit less than 45 and a plasticity index less than 20.

5. Be approved by the Special Inspection Agency.

C. Unacceptable soils shall be defined as following:

1. ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, PT or a combination of these group symbols.

2. Unacceptable soils also to include acceptable soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Free-Draining Granular Fill: Free-draining granular fill shall comply with the following:

1. Be a naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone.

2. Be clean and free of fines.

3. Comply with ASTM D2940.

4. Be uniformly graded as follows:



Grade No. 1-1/2" 1" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" No. 4

CA7 100 95 ± 5 - 45 ± 15 - 5 max


E. Engineered Fill and Utility Base Course shall comply with the following:

1. Be a naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, natural or crushed sand;

2. Comply with ASTM D2940;

01/27/2020 370



3. Be uniformly graded as follows:



Grade No. 1-1/2" 1" 1/2” No. 4 No. 16 No. 200

CA6 100 to 90 95 ± 5 75 ± 15 43 ± 13 25 ± 15 8 ± 4


F. Material Applications: Provide and install material meeting with the above requirements as follows:

1. General fill: Acceptable soils.

2. Backfill against basement and retaining walls for 2 feet directly adjacent to wall: Free-draining granular fill.

3. Backfill at over-excavated areas beneath footings: Engineered fill.

4. Sub-grade layer beneath slabs-on-grade: Refer to drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify and verify required lines, levels, contours and benchmark elevations for the work are as indicated.

B. Protect plant life, lawns, other features and vegetation to remain as a portion of the final landscaping.

C. Contractor shall provide for de-watering of excavations from surface water, ground water or seepage. Where ground water occurs during excavation, special procedures shall be implemented as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer of Record.

D. Identify known underground utility locations with stakes and flags.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. All excavations shall be safely and properly backfilled.

B. All abandoned footings, utilities and other structures that interfere with new construction shall be removed.

C. All unacceptable material and organic material shall be removed from below all proposed slabs-on-grade and the exposed natural soil shall be proof rolled and the compaction verified by the soils testing firm prior to placing fill. Proof-roll with a loaded tandem dump truck, loaded ready-mix truck, roller, or equivalent weight vehicle. Materials exhibiting weakness, such as those exhibiting rutting or pumping, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable compacted fill material.

D. Do not excavate within the 45-degree bearing splay of any adjacent foundations.

E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard (measured by volume). Provide Owner with unit price per cubic yard for obstructions larger than 1/3 cubic yard.

01/27/2020 371



F. Outside 45-degree bearing splay of foundations, correct areas over excavated with aggregate at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Within the 45-degree bearing splay of foundations, correct areas over excavated with 2000 psi concrete fill at no additional cost to the Owner. Notify the Architect prior to performing such work.

H. Hand trim final excavation to remove all loose material.

I. Contractor shall form all dams and perform other work necessary for keeping the excavation clear of water during the progress of the work and, at his own expense, shall pump or otherwise remove all surface and perched water which accumulates in the excavations. Perched water that cannot be de-watered in 48 hours of continuous pumping at a minimum rate of 60 gpm in dry weather shall be considered ground water.

J. Stockpile excavated material in the area designated and remove excess material not being used, from the site.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Verify foundation perimeter drainage system is complete and has been inspected prior to backfilling against foundation walls.

B. Support pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill.

C. Systematically backfill to allow necessary time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, spongy or frozen subgrade surfaces.

D. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

E. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, make grade changes gradual.

F. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, slope grade away from the building a minimum of 2 inches in 10 feet.

G. Contractor shall procure the approval of the subgrade from the Special Inspection Agency prior to the start of any filling or bedding operations.

H. Place a minimum width of 24 inches of free-draining granular fill against all basement and retaining walls for the full height of the wall.

I. Do not begin any backfill operations against any concrete walls until the concrete has achieved its specified strength.

J. Do not backfill against below grade.

K. Place and mechanically compact granular fill in continuous layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted depth.

L. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage adjacent utilities, vapor barriers, foundation perimeter drainage and foundation waterproofing.

M. All surplus fill materials are to be removed from the site.

N. Fill material stockpiles shall be free of unacceptable soil materials.

01/27/2020 372



O. After work is complete, remove all excess stockpile material and repair stockpile area to its original condition.

3.4 COMPACTION

A. Compact all fill that will support building footings or floor slabs to 98 percent of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698. For relative cohesionless fill materials, where the percent passing the #200 sieve is less than 10 and the moisture density curve indicates only slight sensitivity to changing moisture content, compaction requirements should be changed to 75 percent relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.

B. Compact all fills that support paving and landscape per civil specifications.

3.5 FOUNDATIONS

A. Each footing excavation should be cleared of all obstructions and other organic or deleterious materials.

B. Localized areas of unstable or unacceptable material may be discovered during the stripping and excavation operation and may require over-excavation and backfilling. The Special Inspection Agency shall be present during the proof rolling to evaluate any localized areas and make recommendations regarding over-excavation, backfilling and recompaction of these areas. Fill placement and compaction shall be inspected and tested by the Special Inspection Agency.

C. Footing elevations shown on the drawings designate a minimum depth of footing where an appropriate soil bearing pressure is expected. Footings, piers and/or walls shall be lowered or extended as required to reach soil meeting the design bearing pressure. This work shall be performed per the recommendations of the Special Inspection Agency.

D. All footing excavations shall be recompacted by hand-operated, vibratory compaction equipment, except where compaction will degrade the integrity of subgrade soils. In these instances, bottom of footing excavations should be hand-trimmed to remove loosened material.

E. All excavation and recompacted surfaces shall be inspected and tested to a depth of 2.0 feet below the excavated elevation by the Special Inspection Agency. Additional field density tests should be performed for each one foot of fill material placed. Any areas not in compliance with the compaction requirements should be corrected and re-tested prior to placement of fill material.

F. For foundation areas where over excavation is performed, place and mechanically compact Engineered fill material in continuous layers not to exceed 6 inches compacted depth.

3.6 SLAB-ON-GRADE

A. All disturbed areas after the clearing and stripping operation should be proof-rolled and recompacted with a heavy vibratory drum roller (approved by the Special Inspection Agency) in the static mode. The compactor should make a minimum of 10 passes, with a minimum of one foot overlap of each pass. The compactor speed should be less than 0.2 MPH.

B. The Special Inspection Agency shall monitor proof-rolling and compaction operations. This area should then be tested for compaction to a depth of 2.0 feet below the compacted surface prior to the placement of any structural fill material.

C. Refer to drawings for required sub-grade preparation beneath slabs-on-grade.

01/27/2020 373



3.7 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL (AT SLAB-ON-GRADE LOCATIONS)

A. Excavate and backfill utility trenches under wall footings as shown on the drawings

B. Place utility base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. Place and compact utility base course on trench bottoms and where indicated.

D. Lay underground utilities on 6” sand bedding, which meets the acceptable criteria of Section 2.1,B.

E. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

F. After connection joints are made, any misalignment can be corrected by tamping the sand around the utilities.

G. Place and compact initial backfill of acceptable sand to a height of 6 inches over the utility pipe or conduit in 6 inches layer meeting specified compaction requirements.

H. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit.

I. Place and compact final backfill using acceptable soil to final subgrade elevation meeting specified compaction requirements.

J. Backfill voids with acceptable soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

K. Special Inspection Agency shall monitor and test compacted backfill to verify final compaction meets the specified requirement.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Top surface of backfilling under paved areas: Plus or minus ½ inch from required elevation.

B. Top surface of general backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevation.

END OF SECTION

01/27/2020 374

REPORT COVER PAGE

Geotechnical Engineering Report

Wilton Community School Lobby AdditionWilton, Iowa

January 21, 2020

Terracon Project No. 07195149

Prepared for:Wilton Community School District

Wilton, Iowa

Prepared by:Terracon Consultants, Inc.

Bettendorf, Iowa

01/27/2020 375

01/27/2020 376

Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable

REPORT TOPICS

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 1SITE CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... 1PROJECT DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................. 2GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION ...................................................................... 2GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 3EARTHWORK................................................................................................................. 4SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS ........................................................................................... 6FLOOR SLABS............................................................................................................... 8GENERAL COMMENTS ................................................................................................. 9

Note: This report was delivered in a web-based format. Orange Bold text in the report indicates a referencedsection heading. The PDF version also includes hyperlinks which direct the reader to that section and clickingon the GeoReport logo will bring you back to this page. For more interactive features, please view your projectonline at client.terracon.com.

ATTACHMENTS

SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLANGEOMODELEXPLORATION RESULTSEXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURESSUPPORTING INFORMATION

01/27/2020 377

http://client.terracon.com/

Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 1

INTRODUC TION

Geotechnical Engineering ReportWilton Community School Lobby Addition

1002 Cypress StreetWilton, Iowa

Terracon Project No. 07195149January 21, 2020

INTRODUCTION

This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering

services performed for the proposed school lobby addition to be located at 1002 Cypress Street

in Wilton, Iowa. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical

engineering recommendations relative to:

■ Subsurface conditions ■ Foundation design and construction

■ Earthwork, including site preparation ■ Floor slab support

The geotechnical engineering scope of services for this project included two borings extending to

approximately 15 feet below existing site grades. Maps showing the site and boring locations are

shown in the Site Location and Exploration Plan sections, respectively. The results of the

laboratory testing performed on samples obtained during the field exploration are included on the

boring logs in the Exploration Results section.

SITE CONDITIONS

The following description of site conditions is derived from our site visit in association with the

field exploration.

Item Description

Parcel Information The project is located at the existing Wilton Community School at 1002

Cypress Street in Wilton, Iowa. See Site Location

ExistingImprovements

The proposed addition is located in a primarily undeveloped area on the south

side of the existing school. Sidewalks, trees, and associated utilities are

present.

Current GroundCover grass/vegetation, trees, concrete sidewalks

Existing TopographyBased on our field exploration, the site gently slopes downward from west to

east with about 4½ feet of elevation difference measured between the boring

locations.

Site History Terracon has performed explorations and prepared geotechnical engineering

reports in 1972, 1979, 1992, 2003, and 2014 for the existing school.

01/27/2020 378

Geotechnical Engineering ReportWilton Community School Lobby Addition ■ Wilton, Iowa

January 21, 2020 ■ Terracon Project No. 07195149


PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Our current understanding of the project conditions is as follows:

Item Description

Information ProvidedProposed Boring Plan dated December 3, 2019, prepared by IMEG Corp

(IMEG)

Project Description

A new single-story addition is planned to the south end of the existing

school, and is expected to have a plan area of about 12,800 square feet.

The new addition includes a lobby/commons area, concession stands,

offices, locker rooms, and restrooms.

Building Construction masonry walls with grade supported floor slab

Finished Floor ElevationNot provided; but is anticipated to match the finish floor elevation of the

existing building.

Maximum Loads

The maximum building loads were not provided by Wilton Community

School District (WCSD) or IMEG; however, the following values were used

in our report:

■ Columns: 75 kips

■ Walls: 6 kips per linear foot (klf)

■ Slabs: 100 pounds per square foot (psf)

GradingA grading plan was not provided, but cuts on the order of 3½ feet and fills

of about 1 foot are expected for the new addition.

GEOTECHNICAL CHARACTERIZATION

A general characterization of the subsurface conditions was developed for the site based upon

our review of the subsurface borings and laboratory test results. This characterization, termed

GeoModel, forms the basis of our geotechnical evaluation of the subsurface conditions for use in

developing recommendations for the project. Subsurface conditions observed at each boring are

indicated on the individual logs in the Exploration Results section; the GeoModel is in the

Attachments.

As part of our analyses, we identified the following model layers within the subsurface profile. For

a more detailed view of the model layer depths at each boring location, refer to the GeoModeland Exploration Results.

Model Layer Layer Name General Description1 Surface Topsoil

2 Existing Fill Lean Clay

3 Native SoilLean Clay, Silty Clay;

Clayey Sand

01/27/2020 379




The boreholes were observed during and shortly after drilling for the presence and level of

subsurface water. Water was not observed in the borings at either of these times, which is provided

on the boring logs in Exploration Results.

Subsurface water level fluctuations occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall,

runoff, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. Subsurface water

levels during construction or at other times in the life of the structure and pavements may be

higher or lower than the levels indicated on the boring logs. The possibility of subsurface water

level fluctuations should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for

the project.

GEOTECHNICAL OVERVIEW

Existing fill was encountered in the borings and extended to depths of about 3½ to 8½ feet and

could be present to greater depths in areas of the sites not explored. Documentation regarding

placement and compaction of the existing fill was not available for our review. Shallow foundations

and floor slabs supported over undocumented fills often do not perform predictably. Although the

existing fill may have been in place for some time, without documentation of testing during

placement, there is a risk of unpredictable performance and larger than normal settlements of

foundations and floor slabs supported over the undocumented fill. Based on the anticipated cut/fill

as noted in Project Description, we anticipate that the majority of the existing fill will be removed

during site grading. To provide positive support of foundations and floor slabs, it is our opinion

that any remaining existing undocumented fill be removed and replaced with engineered fill placed

and compacted as discussed in this report.

If WCSD accepts the possible risk of larger than normal settlements and associated damage to

floor slabs, walls supported on floor slabs, etc. in exchange for reduced construction costs, the

existing fill could be left in place below the floor slab. The foundations in this area should be

supported on native soils or engineered fill extending to native soils. Terracon should be retained

to observe and test the existing fill during floor slab subgrade preparation to help identify low-

density fill zones. If unsuitable fill or native soils are encountered during construction, they must

be improved, or removed and replaced with engineered fill. Removal and replacement of the

existing fill to a depth of 12 inches below the floor subgrade elevation could also be considered

to possibly increase the uniformity of support beneath the slabs. If WCSD is not willing to accept

the risks discussed, then the existing fill should be removed from below the additions and replaced

with engineered fill placed and compacted as recommended in this report. In our opinion,

Terracon should further evaluate the existing fill soils once the topsoil has been removed.

The existing fill and native soils are easily disturbed by construction traffic. Lightweight

construction equipment should be used as much as practical. Care must be taken by the

contractor to reduce disturbance of the subgrade soils; however, it will likely be necessary to

improve the in-place subgrade soils in some areas of the site for support of construction

01/27/2020 380




equipment required to construct the project and to place and compact engineered fill. Refer to

Earthwork for additional information.

The General Comments section provides an understanding of the report limitations.

EARTHWORK

Site Preparation

Existing fill, sidewalks, and/or other remnants of previous structures within proposed building area

should be removed as outlined in Geotechnical Overview prior to new fill placement and/or

building construction. Removal depths will likely vary across the site and should be reviewed by

Terracon and adjusted based on conditions encountered during site preparation to avoid lowering

the site any more than necessary. Organic soils removed during site preparation should not be

used as engineered fill.

After removing the surface materials, existing fill, and other unsuitable materials as discussed

above and Geotechnical Overview, but before placing engineered fill, the exposed soils should

be observed and tested by Terracon. Where recommended by Terracon, subgrade soils should

be scarified to a depth of about 9 inches and be compacted as recommended in this report.

Scarification/compaction and densification of subgrade soils will help provide a firmer base for the

compaction of new fill sections and help delineate soft or disturbed materials that may exist at

shallow depths below grade. Low strength/loose subgrade soils, which cannot be satisfactorily

improved in place could be encountered and should be improved as discussed below.

Fill Material Types

Engineered fill for the project should meet the following material property requirements:

Fill Type 1, 2 USCS Classification Acceptable Location for Placement

CohesiveCL, CL/ML3, ML3

(LL ≤ 45 and PI ≤ 20) all locations

Granular GW, GP, GM, GC4, SW, SP, SM, SC4 all locations

Unsuitable CL/CH5, CH5, MH5, OL, OH5, PT non-structural locations

1. Engineered fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. Frozenmaterial should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. A sample of each materialtype should be submitted to Terracon for evaluation prior to use on this site.

2. Any organic materials, rock fragments larger than 3 inches, and other unsuitable materials should beremoved prior to use as engineered fill.

3. Highly susceptible to frost; unstable when wet.

4. Any fines must be low plasticity.

5. High plasticity. Not recommended beneath movement sensitive features such as foundations and floorslabs.

01/27/2020 381




Fill Compaction Requirements

Engineered fill should meet the following compaction requirements.

Item Description

Fill lift thickness9 inches or less in loose thickness;

thinner lifts will be required when using hand equipment(e.g., jumping jack, vibratory plate compactor, etc.)

Compaction of granular material andcohesive soil 1, 2

at least 95% of the material’s standard Proctor maximumdry density (ASTM D 698)

Moisture content of cohesive soilwithin 2% below to 3% above the material’s standardProctor optimum moisture content at the time of placementand compaction

Moisture content of granular material 3 workable moisture levels

1. We recommend that engineered fill be tested for moisture content and compaction during placement. Shouldthe results of the in-place density tests indicate the specified moisture or compaction limits have not beenmet, the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested as required until the specifiedmoisture and compaction requirements are achieved.

2. If the granular material is a coarse sand, crushed limestone, or gravel, is of a uniform size, or has a lowfines content, compaction comparison to relative density (ASTM D 4253 and D 4254) may be moreappropriate. In this case, granular materials should be compacted to at least 65% of the material’s maximumrelative density.

3. Specifically, moisture levels should be maintained to achieved compaction without bulking during placementor pumping when proofrolled.

Grading and Drainage

All grades must provide effective drainage away from the building addition during and after

construction and should be maintained throughout the life of the structure. Water retained next to

the building addition can result in movements greater than those discussed in this report. Greater

movements can result in unacceptable differential floor slab and/or foundation movements,

cracked slabs and walls, and roof leaks. The roof should have gutters/drains with downspouts

that discharge onto splash blocks at a distance of at least 10 feet from the building addition.

Exposed ground should be sloped and maintained at a minimum 5% away from the building for

at least 10 feet beyond the perimeter of the building. Locally, flatter grades may be necessary to

transition ADA access requirements for flatwork. After building addition construction and

landscaping have been completed, final grades should be verified to document effective drainage

has been achieved. Grades around the structure should also be periodically inspected and

adjusted, as necessary, as part of the structure’s maintenance program. Where paving or flatwork

abuts the structure, a maintenance program should be established to effectively seal and maintain

joints and prevent surface water infiltration.

01/27/2020 382




Earthwork Construction Considerations

Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade water

content prior to construction of floor slabs. Construction traffic over the completed subgrades

should be avoided. The site should also be graded to prevent ponding of surface water on the

prepared subgrades or in excavations. Water collecting over or adjacent to construction areas

should be removed. If the subgrade freezes, desiccates, saturates, or is disturbed, the affected

material should be removed, or the materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and

recompacted prior to floor slab construction.

Improvements of the subgrade soils should be expected. The need for subgrade improvement

and the most appropriate method to improve subgrade soils will depend upon on a number of

factors including the time of year improvements are needed, the final use of the subgrade, soil

type, subsurface water levels, weather conditions, the proposed grading plan, the construction

schedule and methods of construction that will be used. Typical alternatives for improving

subgrades include the following:

■ Scarification, moisture conditioning (typically drying) and compaction or densification of

cohesive or granular soils, respectively

■ Removal and replacement of unsuitable soils with crushed limestone or engineered fill if

appropriate for the application

■ The use of high modulus geotextiles with crushed limestone

■ Chemical treatment (e.g. cement, lime, cement kiln dust, fly ash)

As a minimum, excavations should be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926,

Subpart P, “Excavations” and its appendices, and in accordance with any applicable local, and/or

state regulations. Construction site safety is the sole responsibility of the contractor who controls

the means, methods, and sequencing of construction operations. Under no circumstances shall

the information provided herein be interpreted to mean Terracon is assuming responsibility for

construction site safety, or the contractor's activities; such responsibility shall neither be implied

nor inferred.

SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS

If the site has been prepared in accordance with the requirements noted in GeotechnicalOverview and Earthwork, the following design parameters are applicable for shallow

foundations.

Design Parameters

Item DescriptionMaximum net allowable bearing pressure 1, 2 2,000 psf

01/27/2020 383




Item Description

Minimum foundation dimensions Columns: 30 inches

Continuous: 18 inches

Minimum embedment below finished grade 3, 4 3½ feet

Estimated total settlement from structural loads 2, 5 On the order of 1 inch

Estimated differential settlement 2, 5, 6 About 2/3 of total settlement

1. The maximum net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surroundingoverburden pressure at the footing base elevation. An appropriate factor of safety has been applied.

2. Values provided are for maximum loads noted in Project Description.

3. Unsuitable or soft soils should be overexcavated and replaced per the recommendations presented inEarthwork.

4. For perimeter foundations beneath unheated structures. It should be noted that the maximum frostpenetration in unheated areas can extend to depths on the order of 4½ feet below grade. If it is desired toreduce the potential for frost heave, foundations below unheated areas or areas that will be exposed tofreezing conditions during construction should extend to at least this depth.

5. Foundation settlements will depend on the variations within the subsurface profile, the structural loadingconditions, the embedment depth of the footings, the thickness of the engineered fill, and the quality ofearthwork operations and footing construction; frequent control joints should be provided for walls.

6. Differential settlements between the additions and the respective existing building is anticipated to be onthe order of the total settlement.

Construction Adjacent to Existing Building

Differential settlement between the addition and the existing buildings is expected to approach

the magnitude of the total settlement of the addition. Expansion joints should be provided between

the existing building and the proposed addition to accommodate differential movements between

the structures. Underground piping between the structure should be designed with flexible

couplings and utility knockouts in foundation walls should be oversized, so minor deflections in

alignment do not result in breakage or distress. Care should be taken during excavation adjacent

to existing foundations, to avoid disturbing existing foundation bearing soils.

New footings should bear at or near the bearing elevation of immediately adjacent existing

foundations. Depending upon their locations and loads, footings for the new addition could cause

settlement of adjacent walls. To reduce this concern and risk, clear distances at least equal to the

new footing widths should be maintained between the addition’s footings and the existing building.

Foundation Construction Considerations

The soils at the base of each footing excavation should be observed and tested by Terracon. Test

probes should be performed at each isolated spread footing and at regular intervals along

continuous footings. Where new fill is present to greater depths beneath the bearing elevation,

field density tests may be performed instead of proving the engineered fill.

If unsuitable bearing soils are encountered at the base of the planned footing excavation or are

present within the zone of influence as determined by Terracon, the footing excavations should

01/27/2020 384




be deepened to suitable native bearing materials. Footings could be supported at the lower

elevation on suitable soil or at the original design elevation on engineered fill or lean concrete

extending to suitable bearing materials. For placement of engineered fill beneath footings, the

footing excavations should extend laterally at least 8 inches beyond the edges of the footing for

each foot of overexcavation depth below the footing base elevation. If the excavation can maintain

a stable side slope, widening of the excavation may not be required for use of lean concrete. The

overexcavated depth should then be backfilled up to the foundation base elevation with lean

concrete or crushed limestone placed in lifts and compacted to at least 95% of the material's

standard Proctor maximum dry density or at least 65% of the material’s maximum relative density.

Each lift of new engineered fill should be observed and tested by Terracon. The overexcavation

and backfill procedure is illustrated in the following figure.

The base of each foundation excavation should be free of water and loose material prior to placing

concrete. Concrete should be placed as soon after excavating as possible to reduce disturbance

of the bearing soils. If the soils at bearing level become excessively dry, disturbed, saturated, or

frozen, the affected soil should be removed prior to placing concrete. Placement of a lean concrete

mud-mat over the bearing soils may be required to reduce disturbance of the bearing soils for this

site.

FLOOR SLABS

Floor Slab Design Parameters

Item Description

Floor slab support 1, 2, 3 approved engineered fill placed and compacted in accordance with

EarthworkGranular leveling course 4 6 inches of well-graded granular material

Modulus of subgrade reaction 150 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in)

Note: The excavations in the sketches shown vertical for convenience.

Excavations should be sloped as necessary for safety

01/27/2020 385




1. Differential movement between foundations and grade-supported floors should be considered by thestructural engineer.

2. Joints should be constructed at regular intervals as recommended by the American Concrete Institute (ACI)to help control the location of cracking.

3. Floor slabs should be supported on at least 18 inches of LVC engineered fill, as discussed in GeotechnicalOverview.

4. The floor slab should be placed on a leveling course comprised of well-graded granular material compactedto at least 95% of the material’s standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698).

The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs on grade covered with

wood, tile, carpet, or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slab will

support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder,

the slab designer should refer to ACI 302 and/or ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding

the use and placement of a vapor retarder.

Where floor slabs are tied to perimeter walls or turn-down slabs to meet structural or other

construction objectives, our experience indicates differential movement between the walls and

slabs will likely be observed in adjacent slab expansion joints or floor slab cracks beyond the

length of the structural dowels. The structural engineer should account for potential differential

settlement through use of sufficient joints, appropriate reinforcing, or other means.

Floor Slab Construction Considerations

Floor slab subgrade soils should be prepared as discussed in the Earthwork section of this report.

On most project sites, the site grading is generally accomplished early in the construction phase;

however, as construction proceeds, the subgrade may be disturbed due to utility excavations,

construction traffic, desiccation, rainfall, etc. As a result, the floor slab subgrade may not be suitable

for placement of concrete, and corrective action will be required.

Terracon should review the condition of the floor slab subgrade immediately prior to placement of

the granular leveling course and construction of the slab. Particular attention should be paid to high

traffic areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier and to areas containing backfilled trenches. Areas

where unsuitable conditions are located should be repaired by removing and replacing the affected

material with properly compacted fill.

GENERAL COMMENTS

Our analysis and opinions are based upon our understanding of the project, the geotechnical

conditions in the area, and the data obtained from our site exploration. Natural variations will occur

between boring locations or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature

and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. Terracon

should be retained to provide observation and testing services during pertinent construction

phases. If variations appear, we can provide further evaluation and supplemental

recommendations. If variations are noted in the absence of our observation and testing services

01/27/2020 386

01/27/2020 387

ATTACHMENTS

01/27/2020 388

SITE LOCATION AND EXPLORATION PLAN

01/27/2020 389

SITE LOCATIONWilton Community School Lobby Addition ■ Wilton, Iowa


Note to Preparer: This is a large table with outside borders. Just click inside the tableabove this text box, then paste your GIS Toolbox image.

When paragraph markers are turned on you may notice a line of hidden text above andoutside the table – please leave that alone. Limit editing to inside the table.

The line at the bottom about the general location is a separate table line. You can editit as desired, but try to keep to a single line of text to avoid reformatting the page.

SITE LOCA TION

DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY, AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS

01/27/2020 390

EXPLORATION PLANWilton Community School Lobby Addition ■ Wilton, Iowa


Note to Preparer: This is a large table with outside borders. Just click inside the tableabove this text box, then paste your GIS Toolbox image.

When paragraph markers are turned on you may notice a line of hidden text above andoutside the table – please leave that alone. Limit editing to inside the table.

The line at the bottom about the general location is a separate table line. You can editit as desired, but try to keep to a single line of text to avoid reformatting the page.

EXPLORATION P LAN

DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY, AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS

01/27/2020 391

GEOMODEL

01/27/2020 392

80

82

84

86

88

90

92

94

96

98

100

102

104

EL

EV

AT

ION

(M

SL

) (f

eet)

Wilton Community School Lobby Addition Wilton, IowaTerracon Project No. 07195149

NOTES:Layering shown on this figure has been developed by the projectengineer for purposes of modeling the subsurface conditions asrequired for the subsequent geotechnical engineering for this project.Numbers adjacent to soil column indicate depth below ground surface.

GEOMODEL

This is not a cross section. This is intended to display the Geotechnical Model only. See individual logs for more detailed conditions.

Lean Clay, and Silty Clay;Clayey Sand3

LEGEND

Topsoil

Fill

Clayey Sand

Lean Clay

Silty Clay

Model Layer General DescriptionLayer Name

Topsoil1

Lean Clay2

1

2

Native Soil

Surface

Existing Fill

1

8.5

15

1

2

3

1

3.5

15

1

2

3

01/27/2020 393

EXPLORATION RESULTS

01/27/2020 394

3-4-5N=9

6-8-7N=15

1-2-2N=4

12

20

6

12

16

1

2

3

4

5

525

21

91

94

TOPSOIL, approx. 12"

FILL - LEAN CLAY , trace sand, gray

CLAYEY SAND (SC), fine grained, brown,medium dense

LEAN CLAY (CL), gray and brown, soft tomedium stiff

Boring Terminated at 15 Feet

1.0

8.5

13.0

15.0

102.5

95

90.5

88.5

Hammer Type: AutomaticStratification lines are approximate. In-situ, the transition may be gradual.

TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

GE

O S

MA

RT

LO

G-N

O W

ELL

071

9514

9 W

ILT

ON

CO

MM

UN

ITY

.GP

J T

ER

RA

CO

N_D

AT

AT

EM

PLA

TE

.GD

T 1

/21

/20

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

DE

PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

RE

CO

VE

RY

(In

.)

SA

MP

LEN

UM

BE

R

UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

psf)

OR

GA

NIC

CO

NT

EN

T(%

)

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

LOCATION See Exploration Plan

Latitude: 41.594° Longitude: -91.0109°

GR

AP

HIC

LO

G

MO

DE

L LA

YE

R

DEPTH ELEVATION (Ft.)

Surface Elev.: 103.5 (Ft.)

Page 1 of 1

Advancement Method:Continuous-Flight Solid-Stem Auger

Abandonment Method:Boring backfilled with auger cuttings and a down hole pluginstalled near ground surface upon completion.

Notes:

Project No.: 07195149

Drill Rig: 748

BORING LOG NO. 1Wilton Community School DistrictCLIENT:

Driller: RP

Boring Completed: 12-30-2019

ENGINEER: IMEG Corp.

PROJECT: Wilton Community School Lobby Addition

Elevations measured in the field

See Exploration and Testing Procedures for adescription of field and laboratory proceduresused and additional data (If any).

See Supporting Information for explanation ofsymbols and abbreviations.

1002 Cypress Street Wilton, IowaSITE:

Boring Started: 12-30-2019

870 40th AveBettendorf, IA

None observed while drilling

None observed after drilling

WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS

1

2

3

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

01/27/2020 395

1.0

3.5

7.0

13.0

15.0

98

95.5

92

86

84

2-4-4N=8

2-3-9N=12

1-2-3N=5

15

10

12

12

14

1

2

3

4

5

3050

24

22

98

99

43-21-22

TOPSOIL, approx. 12"

FILL - LEAN CLAY , trace sand, gray

LEAN CLAY (CL), trace sand, gray andbrown, medium stiff to stiff

CLAYEY SAND (SC), fine grained, brownand gray, medium dense

SILTY CLAY (CL/ML), gray and brown,medium stiff

Boring Terminated at 15 Feet

Hammer Type: AutomaticStratification lines are approximate. In-situ, the transition may be gradual.

TH

IS B

OR

ING

LO

G IS

NO

T V

ALI

D IF

SE

PA

RA

TE

D F

RO

M O

RIG

INA

L R

EP

OR

T.

GE

O S

MA

RT

LO

G-N

O W

ELL

071

9514

9 W

ILT

ON

CO

MM

UN

ITY

.GP

J T

ER

RA

CO

N_D

AT

AT

EM

PLA

TE

.GD

T 1

/21

/20

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

OB

SE

RV

AT

ION

S

DE

PT

H (

Ft.)

5

10

15

DEPTH ELEVATION (Ft.)

Surface Elev.: 99 (Ft.)

Page 1 of 1

Advancement Method:Continuous-Flight Solid-Stem Auger

Abandonment Method:Boring backfilled with auger cuttings and a down hole pluginstalled near ground surface upon completion.

Notes:

Project No.: 07195149

Drill Rig: 748

BORING LOG NO. 2Wilton Community School DistrictCLIENT:

Driller: RP

Boring Completed: 12-30-2019

ENGINEER: IMEG Corp.

PROJECT: Wilton Community School Lobby Addition

Elevations measured in the field

See Exploration and Testing Procedures for adescription of field and laboratory proceduresused and additional data (If any).

See Supporting Information for explanation ofsymbols and abbreviations.

1002 Cypress Street Wilton, IowaSITE:

Boring Started: 12-30-2019

FIE

LD T

ES

TR

ES

ULT

S

RE

CO

VE

RY

(In

.)

SA

MP

LEN

UM

BE

R

UN

CO

NF

INE

DC

OM

PR

ES

SIV

ES

TR

EN

GT

H (

psf)

OR

GA

NIC

CO

NT

EN

T(%

)

WA

TE

RC

ON

TE

NT

(%

)

DR

Y U

NIT

WE

IGH

T (

pcf)

ATTERBERGLIMITS

LL-PL-PI

LOCATION See Exploration Plan

Latitude: 41.594° Longitude: -91.0102°

GR

AP

HIC

LO

G

MO

DE

L LA

YE

R

870 40th AveBettendorf, IA

None observed while drilling

None observed after drilling

WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS

1

2

3

SA

MP

LE T

YP

E

01/27/2020 396

EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES

01/27/2020 397



Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES 1 of 2

EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES

Field Exploration

IMEG requested the number of borings and their locations; Terracon proposed their depths.

Boring Number Boring Depth (feet) 1 Location

1, 2 15 See Exploration Plan

1. Below ground surface

Boring Layout and Elevations: The borings were laid out by the drill crew using a measuring

tape from the existing building corners and estimating right angles. Latitude and longitude values

were obtained by the drill crew with a handheld GPS unit at the boring locations. Approximate

surface elevations were obtained by our drill crew using an engineer’s level and grade rod. The

elevations were referenced to the finish floor elevation at Entrance S3 of the existing school (BM)

shown in Exploration Plan; an elevation of 100 feet was assigned by Terracon to this reference

datum. The locations and elevations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the

degree implied by the means and methods used to define them.

Subsurface Exploration Procedures: The borings were advanced with an ATV-mounted rotary

drill rig using continuous-flight solid-stem augers. Samples were obtained on a 2½-foot depth

interval in the upper 10 feet of each boring, and at 5-foot intervals thereafter. Sampling was

performed using thin-wall tube and/or split-barrel sampling procedures. In the thin-walled tube

sampling procedure, a thin-walled, seamless steel tube with a sharp cutting edge is pushed

hydraulically into the soil to obtain a relatively undisturbed sample. In the split-barrel sampling

procedure, a standard 2-inch outer diameter split-barrel sampling spoon is driven into the bottom of

the borehole by a 140-pound automatic hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. Greater energy

efficiency is typically obtained using an automatic hammer as compared to a safety hammer

operated with a cathead and rope. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon

the last 12 inches of a normal 18-inch penetration is recorded as the Standard Penetration Test

(SPT) resistance value. The SPT resistance values, also referred to as N-values, are indicated

on the boring logs at their test depths. The samples were containerized and taken to our laboratory

for testing and classification by the project engineer. Subsurface water levels were observed

during and after drilling. For safety purposes, the borings were backfilled with auger cuttings and

a downhole plug installed after drilling.

Our exploration team prepared field logs as part of the drilling operations. The sampling depths,

penetration distances, other sampling information, visual classifications of the materials

encountered during drilling and our interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples

were recorded on the field logs. The boring logs included in this report represent the project

01/27/2020 398



Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable EXPLORATION AND TESTING PROCEDURES 2 of 2

engineer's interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on observations and

tests of the samples in our laboratory.

Laboratory Testing

The samples were tested in the laboratory to measure their natural water contents. Dry densities

were obtained, and unconfined compressive strength tests were performed on selected tube

samples. An Atterberg limits test and an organic content test were performed on select samples

to better evaluate their engineering properties. These test results are provided on the boring logs

included in Exploration Results.

The samples were also classified in the laboratory based on visual observation, texture, plasticity,

and the limited laboratory testing described above. The soil descriptions presented on the boring

logs are in accordance with the General Notes and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS)

included in Supporting Information. The estimated USCS group symbols for native soil samples

are shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the USCS is included in SupportingInformation.

01/27/2020 399

SUPPORTING INFORMATION

01/27/2020 400

500 to 1,000

> 8,000

4,000 to 8,000

2,000 to 4,000

1,000 to 2,000

less than 500

Unconfined Compressive StrengthQu, (psf)

ShelbyTube

StandardPenetrationTest

N

(HP)

(T)

(DCP)

UC

(PID)

(OVA)

Standard Penetration TestResistance (Blows/Ft.)

Hand Penetrometer

Torvane

Dynamic Cone Penetrometer

Unconfined CompressiveStrength

Photo-Ionization Detector

Organic Vapor Analyzer

SAMPLING WATER LEVEL FIELD TESTS

Soil classification as noted on the soil boring logs is based Unified Soil Classification System. Where sufficient laboratorydata exist to classify the soils consistent with ASTM D2487 "Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes" thisprocedure is used. ASTM D2488 "Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure)" is also used toclassify the soils, particularly where insufficient laboratory data exist to classify the soils in accordance with ASTM D2487.In addition to USCS classification, coarse grained soils are classified on the basis of their in-place relative density, andfine-grained soils are classified on the basis of their consistency. See "Strength Terms" table below for details. The ASTMstandards noted above are for reference to methodology in general. In some cases, variations to methods are applied as aresult of local practice or professional judgment.

DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Exploration point locations as shown on the Exploration Plan and as noted on the soil boring logs in the form of Latitudeand Longitude are approximate. See Exploration and Testing Procedures in the report for the methods used to locate theexploration points for this project. Surface elevation data annotated with +/- indicates that no actual topographical surveywas conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined fromtopographic maps of the area.

LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES

The soil boring logs contained within this document are intended for application to the project as described in thisdocument. Use of these soil boring logs for any other purpose may not be appropriate.

GENERAL NOTESDESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

RELEVANCE OF SOIL BORING LOG

Water levels indicated on the soil boring logs arethe levels measured in the borehole at the timesindicated. Groundwater level variations will occurover time. In low permeability soils, accuratedetermination of groundwater levels is notpossible with short term water levelobservations.

Water InitiallyEncountered

Water Level After aSpecified Period of Time

Water Level Aftera Specified Period of Time

Cave InEncountered

STRENGTH TERMS

Standard Penetration orN-Value

Blows/Ft.

Descriptive Term(Density)

Hard

15 - 30Very Stiff> 50Very Dense

8 - 15Stiff30 - 50Dense

4 - 8Medium Stiff10 - 29Medium Dense

2 - 4Soft4 - 9Loose

0 - 1Very Soft0 - 3Very Loose

(50% or more passing the No. 200 sieve.)Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing, field visual-manual

procedures or standard penetration resistance

> 30

Descriptive Term(Consistency)

Standard Penetration orN-Value

Blows/Ft.

(More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve.)Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance

CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILSRELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS

01/27/2020 401

UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable

UNIFIED SOI L CLASSI FICATI ON SYSTEM

Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests ASoil Classification

GroupSymbol Group Name B

Coarse-Grained Soils:More than 50% retained

on No. 200 sieve

Gravels:More than 50% ofcoarse fractionretained on No. 4 sieve

Clean Gravels:Less than 5% fines C

Cu ³ 4 and 1 £ Cc £ 3 E GW Well-graded gravel F

Cu < 4 and/or [Cc<1 or Cc>3.0] E GP Poorly graded gravel F

Gravels with Fines:More than 12% fines C

Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F, G, H

Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F, G, H

Sands:50% or more of coarsefraction passes No. 4sieve

Clean Sands:Less than 5% fines D

Cu ³ 6 and 1 £ Cc £ 3 E SW Well-graded sand I

Cu < 6 and/or [Cc<1 or Cc>3.0] E SP Poorly graded sand I

Sands with Fines:More than 12% fines D

Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G, H, I

Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G, H, I

Fine-Grained Soils:50% or more passes the

No. 200 sieve

Silts and Clays:Liquid limit less than 50

Inorganic:PI > 7 and plots on or above “A”line J

CL Lean clay K, L, M

PI < 4 or plots below “A” line J ML Silt K, L, M

Organic:Liquid limit - oven dried

< 0.75 OLOrganic clay K, L, M, N

Liquid limit - not dried Organic silt K, L, M, O

Silts and Clays:Liquid limit 50 or more

Inorganic:PI plots on or above “A” line CH Fat clay K, L, M

PI plots below “A” line MH Elastic Silt K, L, M

Organic:Liquid limit - oven dried

< 0.75 OHOrganic clay K, L, M, P

Liquid limit - not dried Organic silt K, L, M, Q

Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat

A Based on the material passing the 3-inch (75-mm) sieve.

B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add “with cobbles

or boulders, or both” to group name.

C Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded

gravel with silt, GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay, GP-GM poorlygraded gravel with silt, GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay.

D Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded

sand with silt, SW-SC well-graded sand with clay, SP-SM poorly gradedsand with silt, SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay.

E Cu = D60/D10 Cc =

6010

2

30

DxD

)(D

F If soil contains ³ 15% sand, add “with sand” to group name.

G If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM.

H If fines are organic, add “with organic fines” to group name.

I If soil contains ³ 15% gravel, add “with gravel” to group name.

J If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay.

K If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add “with sand” or “with

gravel,” whichever is predominant.

L If soil contains ³ 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add

“sandy” to group name.

MIf soil contains ³ 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add

“gravelly” to group name.

NPI ³ 4 and plots on or above “A” line.

OPI < 4 or plots below “A” line.

P PI plots on or above “A” line.

QPI plots below “A” line.

01/27/2020 402